RU2790440C2 - Transmission method, reception method, transmission device and reception device - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: communication technology.

SUBSTANCE: invention relates to communication technology; it can be used in communication systems using a set of symbols with orthogonal frequency channel division multiplexing (OFDM). A set of domains is identified by means of at least one time resource of resources and at least one frequency resource of frequency resources. A frame includes the first period, during which a preamble is transmitted, and the second period, during which a set of transmitted data is transmitted. The second period includes the first domain, and the first domain includes a data symbol formed of the first transmitted data, a data symbol formed of the second transmitted data and going after the data symbol formed of the first transmitted data, and a fictitious symbol after the data symbol formed of the second transmitted data.

EFFECT: increase in throughput capacity of transmission channels.

9 cl, 107 dwg

Description

The field of technology to which the invention belongs

[0001] The present disclosure relates to a transmission method, a reception method, a transmitter, and a receiver.

State of the art

[0002] The DVB-T2 standard is an example of a digital broadcast standard that uses orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) (see Non-Patent Document (NPL) 5).

[0003] In digital broadcasting, for example, according to the DVB-T2 standard, a frame is configured in which a plurality of data streams are time division multiplexed and data is transmitted on a frame-by-frame basis.

List of bibliographic references

Non-Patent Documents

[0004] NPL 1. R.G. Gallager, "Low-density parity-check codes", IRE Trans. inform. Theory, IT-8, pp. 21-28, 1962.

NPL 2. "Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded MIMO OFDM systems" IEEE Trans. Signal Processing., Vol. 52, Number 2, pp. 348-361, February 2004.

NPL 3. C. Douillard and C. Berrou, "Turbo codes with rate -m/(m+1) constituent convolutional codes", IEEE Trans. Commun., Vol. 53, Number 10, pp. 1630-1638, October 2005.

NPL 4. C. Berrou, "The ten-year-old turbo codes are entering into service", IEEE Communication Magazine, Vol. 41, Number 8, pp. 110-116, August 2003.

NPL 5. DVB Document A122, Frame structure, channel coding and modulation for the second generation digital terrestrial television broadcasting system(DVB-T2), June 2008.

NPL 6. D.J.C. Mackay, "Good error-correcting codes based on very sparse matrices", IEEE Trans. inform. Theory, vol. 45, number 2, pp. 399-431, March 1999.

NPL 7.S.M. Alamouti, "A simple transmit diversity technique for wireless communications", IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun., Vol. 16, Number 8, pp. 1451-1458, October 1998.

NPL 8. V. Tarokh, H. Jafrkhani and A.R. Calderbank, "Space-time block coding for wireless communications: Performance results", IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun., Vol. 17, Number 3, Number 3, pp. 451-460, March 1999.

The essence of the invention

Technical task

[0005] A transmission method, a reception method, a transmitter and a receiver are provided that communicate using a flexible frame configuration.

The solution of the problem

[0006] A transmission method according to one aspect of the present disclosure includes: configuring a frame using a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, by allocating a plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas; and frame transmission. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource from the plurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource from the plurality of frequency resources. The frame includes a first period during which a preamble is transmitted that includes information regarding the frame configuration for the frame, and a second period during which a plurality of transmitted data is transmitted by at least one of time division and frequency division. The second period includes a first area of the plurality of areas, and the first area includes a data symbol formed from the first transmission data of the transmission data set, a data symbol formed from the second transmission data of the transmission data set and followed by a data symbol formed from of the first transmitted data, and a dummy symbol following the data symbol formed from the second transmitted data.

[0007] A receiving method according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes receiving a frame, obtaining information, and performing demodulation. When a frame is received, a frame is received that includes a first period during which a preamble is transmitted and a second period during which a plurality of transmitted data is transmitted by at least one of time division and frequency division. The frame is configured using a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols by allocating a plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource from the plurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource from the plurality of frequency resources. When information is received, information regarding the frame configuration for the frame is obtained from the preamble. When demodulating is performed, at least one of the plurality of transmission data transmitted in the second period is demodulated based on information regarding the frame configuration.

[0008] A transmission apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention includes: a frame configuration module configured to configure a frame using a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols by allocating a plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas; and a transmission module that transmits the frame. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource from the plurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource from the plurality of frequency resources. The frame includes a first period during which a preamble is transmitted that includes information regarding the frame configuration for the frame, and a second period during which a plurality of transmitted data is transmitted by at least one of time division and frequency division. The second period includes a first area of the plurality of areas, and the first area includes a data symbol formed from the first transmission data of the transmission data set, a data symbol formed from the second transmission data of the transmission data set and followed by a data symbol formed from of the first transmitted data, and a dummy symbol following the data symbol formed from the second transmitted data.

[0009] A receiver according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a receiver module, a preamble processor, and a demodulator. The receiving module receives a frame that includes a first period in which a preamble is transmitted and a second period in which a plurality of transmitted data is transmitted by at least one of time division and frequency division. The frame is configured using a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols by allocating a plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource from the plurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource from the plurality of frequency resources. The preamble processor obtains information regarding the frame configuration for the frame from the preamble. The demodulator demodulates, based on the frame configuration information, at least one of the plurality of transmission data transmitted in the second period.

Benefits of the Invention

[0010] According to a transmitter, a receiver, a transmission method, and a reception method according to the present disclosure, communication can be performed using a flexible frame configuration. This results in such advantages that high efficiency in data transmission can be achieved in the communication system, and furthermore, the receiver can receive data efficiently.

Brief description of the drawings

[0011] FIG. 1 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a transmission device.

Fig. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 3 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 4 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 5 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 6 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 7 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using space-time block codes is carried out.

Fig. 8 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using space-time block codes is carried out.

Fig. 9 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 10 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 11 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 12 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 13 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 14 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 15 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 16 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 17 is a view illustrating a configuration example in a case where a transmission method using a MIMO method is implemented.

Fig. 18 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 19 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 20 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 21 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 22 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 23 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a receiver.

Fig. 24 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 25 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 26 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 27 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 28 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 29 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 30 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 31 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 32 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 33 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 34 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 35 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 36 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 37 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 38 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 39 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 40 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 41 is a view illustrating an insertion example of a pilot symbol to be inserted in a group of data symbols.

Fig. 42 is a view illustrating an insertion example of a pilot symbol to be inserted in a group of data symbols.

Fig. 43 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 44 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 45 is a view illustrating an example of domain decomposition in the frequency direction and the time direction.

Fig. 46 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 47 is a view illustrating an example of region decomposition in the time direction.

Fig. 48 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

Fig. 49 is a view illustrating an example of the control character arrangement method.

Fig. 50 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 51 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 52 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 53 is a view illustrating an example of the control character arrangement method.

Fig. 54 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 55 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 56 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 57 is a view illustrating an example of a relationship between a transmitting station and a terminal.

Fig. 58 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a transmission device.

Fig. 59 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 60 is a view illustrating an example of the character arrangement method.

Fig. 61 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a transmission device.

Fig. 62 is a view illustrating a schematic view of a MIMO system.

Fig. 63 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 64 is a view illustrating an example of inserted dummy symbols (dummy slots).

Fig. 65 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 66 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 67 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 68 is a view illustrating an example of an indication unit that indicates a frame configuration.

Fig. 69 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 70 is a view illustrating a frame configuration example.

Fig. 71 is a view illustrating an example of an indication unit that indicates a frame configuration.

Fig. 72 is a view illustrating an example of a relationship between a base station and terminals.

Fig. 73 is a view illustrating an example of communication between a base station and terminals.

Fig. 74 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 75 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a terminal.

Fig. 76 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a transmitter included in a base station.

Fig. 77 is a view illustrating examples of data symbol group generators included in the base station.

Fig. 78 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a receiver included in the terminal.

Fig. 79 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 80 is a view illustrating an example of the configuration of time boundaries or frequency boundaries between groups of data symbols.

Fig. 81 is a view illustrating an example of the configuration of time boundaries or frequency boundaries between groups of data symbols.

Fig. 82 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 83 is a view illustrating another configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 84 is a view illustrating an example of an operation of an interleaver for group #N of data symbols.

Fig. 85 is a view illustrating a configuration example of an interleaver for data symbol group #N.

Fig. 86 is a view illustrating another configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 87 is a view illustrating another configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 88 is a view illustrating an example of a carrier interleaving operation.

Fig. 89 is a view illustrating another configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 90 is a view illustrating another configuration example of a base station.

Fig. 91 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 92 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 93 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 94 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 95 is a view illustrating an example of communication between a base station and a plurality of terminals.

Fig. 96 is a view illustrating a data symbol group configuration example.

Fig. 97 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 98 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 99 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 100 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 101 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 102 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 103 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 104 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 105 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal.

Fig. 106 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a transmission antenna.

Fig. 107 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a receiving antenna.

Detailed description of embodiments

[0012] Spatial Multiplexing MIMO Method

As a communication method using multiple antennas, for example, a communication method referred to as MIMO (multi-input, multiple-output) is provided.

[0013] In multi-antenna communication, which is typically MIMO, data reception quality and/or data rate (per unit time) can be improved by modulating the transmitted data of one or more sequences and simultaneously transmitting respective modulated signals from different antennas by using the same frequency. (general frequency).

[0014] FIG. 62 is a view explaining the structure of a spatial multiplexing MIMO method. The MIMO method in FIG. 62 indicates an example of the configurations of the transmitter and receiver in the case where the number of transmit antennas is 2 (TX1 and TX2), the number of receive antennas (RX1 and RX2) is 2, and the number of modulated transmission signals (transmission streams) is 2.

[0015] The transmitter has a signal conditioner and a wireless communication processor. The signal conditioner performs channel coding for data, performs MIMO precoding processing, and generates two transmission signals z ₁ (t) and z ₂ (t) that can be transmitted simultaneously by using the same frequency (common frequency). The wireless processor multiplexes the individual transmitted signals in the frequency direction as needed, i. converts the transmitted signals into multiple carriers (eg, an OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) method), and also inserts a pilot signal for evaluation by a receiver of transmission channel distortion, frequency offset, phase distortion, and the like. However, the pilot may evaluate other impairments and the like, and the receiver may also use the pilot to detect signals. It should be noted that the mode of using the pilot signal in the receiver is not limited to this mode. The two transmit antennas use two transmit antennas (TX1 and TX2) to transmit z ₁ (t) and z ₂ (t).

[0016] The receiver includes receive antennas (RX1 and RX2), a wireless communication processor, a channel jitter estimator, and a signal processor. The receive antenna (RX1) receives the signals transmitted from the two transmit antennas (TX1 and TX2) of the transmitter. The channel jitter estimator estimates the channel jitter value by using a pilot signal, and provides the channel jitter estimate value to the signal processor. The signal processor recovers the data contained in z ₁ (t) and z ₂ (t) based on the channel values estimated as signals received at the two receive antennas, and obtains the data as one piece of received data. However, the received data may be a hard definable value of "0" or "1", or may be a soft definable value, such as a log-likelihood or a log-likelihood ratio.

[0017] In addition, various coding methods such as turbo codes (eg, duobinary turbo codes) and LDPC (sparse parity check) codes are used as coding methods (NPL 1-6, etc.).

[0018] First exemplary embodiment

Fig. 1 is an example of a configuration of a transmitter (eg, a broadcast station) in the present exemplary embodiment.

[0019] The data conditioner 102 receives the input of the transmission data 10801 and the control signal 109. The data conditioner 102 performs error correction encoding and mapping (transformation), which is based on the modulation method, based on information such as error correction encoding information contained in control signal 109, and modulation method information contained in the control signal 109. The data conditioner 102 outputs a baseband (quadrature) signal 103 for data transmission.

[0020] The second preamble generator 105 receives input of the second preamble transmission data 104 and the control signal 109. The second preamble generator 105 performs error correction encoding and mapping, which is based on the modulation method, based on information such as second preamble error correction information contained in the control signal 109, and modulation method information contained in the control signal 109. The second preamble generator 105 outputs a second preamble baseband (quadrature) signal 106.

[0021] The control signal generator 108 receives input of the first preamble transmission data 107 and the second preamble transmission data 104. The control signal generator 108 outputs, as a control signal 109, method information for transmitting each symbol. Examples of a method for transmitting each symbol include a selected transmission method including an error correction code, an error correction code coding rate, a modulation method, a block length, a frame configuration, and a transmission method for regularly switching precoding matrices, a method for inserting a pilot symbols, information, etc. IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) (or Inverse Fourier Transform)/FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) (or Fourier Transform), method information for reducing PAPR (peak to average power ratio), and method information for inserting a guard interval.

[0022] The frame configuration module 110 receives the input of the (quadrature) baseband signal 103 for data transmission, the (quadrature) baseband signal 106 of the second preamble, and the control signal 109. The frame configuration module 110 performs rearrangement on the frequency axis and the time axis based on the frame configuration information contained in the control signal. The frame configuration unit 110 outputs the (quadrature) signal 111_1 in the baseband stream 1 and the (quadrature) signal 111_2 in the baseband stream 2 according to the frame configuration. The (quadrature) signal 111_1 in the baseband of stream 1 is the signal obtained after mapping, i. the baseband signal based on the modulation method to be used, and the (quadrature) baseband signal 111_2 of the stream 2 is the signal obtained after mapping, i. baseband signal based on the modulation method to be used.

[0023] The signal processor 112 receives input of the stream 1 baseband signal 111_1, the stream 2 baseband signal 111_2, and the control signal 109. The signal processor 112 outputs the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signal processing based on the transmission method contained in the control signal 109 and the modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing based on the transmission method contained in the control signal 109.

[0024] It should be noted that, in a signal processor, for example, a MIMO transmission method using precoding and phase change (herein referred to as "MIMO method"), a MISO (multi-input, single output) transmission method using spatial - time block codes (space frequency block codes) (referred to here as "MISO method") and a SISO (single input, single output) or SIMO (single input, multiple output) transmission method for transmitting a modulated signal of one stream from one antennas. However, a case is also contemplated in which a single stream modulated signal is transmitted from multiple antennas in the SISO method and the SIMO method. The operation of the signal processor 112 is described in detail below. The MIMO transmission method may also be a MIMO transmission method that does not perform a phase change.

[0025] The pilot signal insertion unit 114_1 receives input of the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signal processing and the control signal 109. The pilot signal insertion unit 114_1 inserts a pilot symbol into the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signal processing, based on information contained in the control signal 109 and associated with a method for inserting a pilot symbol. The pilot inserter 114_1 outputs the modulated signal 115_1 obtained after the insertion of the pilot symbols.

[0026] The pilot signal inserter 114_2 receives input of the modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing and the control signal 109. The pilot signal inserter 114_2 inserts a pilot symbol into the modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing, based on information contained in the control signal 109 and associated with a method for inserting a pilot symbol. The pilot inserter 114_2 outputs the modulated signal 115_2 obtained after the insertion of the pilot symbols.

[0027] The IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) module 116_1 receives input of the modulated signal 115_1 obtained after inserting the pilot symbols and the control signal 109. The IFFT module 116_1 performs IFFT based on the IFFT method information contained in the control signal 109. IFFT- module 116_1 outputs signal 117_1 received after IFFT.

[0028] The IFFT module 116_2 receives input of the modulated signal 115_2 obtained after the insertion of the pilot symbols and the control signal 109. The IFFT module 116_2 performs IFFT based on the IFFT method information contained in the control signal 109. The IFFT module 116_2 outputs the signal 117_2 obtained after IFFT.

[0029] The PAPR reduction unit 118_1 receives input of the post-IFFT signal 117_1 and the control signal 109. The PAPR reduction unit 118_1 performs PAPR reduction processing on the post-IFFT signal 117_1 based on the information contained in the control signal 109 and associated with decrease in PAPR. The PAPR reduction unit 118_1 outputs the signal 119_1 obtained after the PAPR reduction.

[0030] The PAPR reduction unit 118_2 receives input of the post-IFFT signal 117_2 and the control signal 109. The PAPR reduction unit 118_2 performs PAPR reduction processing on the post-IFFT signal 117_2 based on the information contained in the control signal 109 and associated with decrease in PAPR. The PAPR reduction unit 118_2 outputs the signal 119_2 obtained after the PAPR reduction.

[0031] The guard interval inserter 120_1 receives input of the signal 119_1 obtained after the PAPR reduction and the control signal 109. The guard interval inserter 120_1 inserts the guard interval into the signal 119_1 obtained after the PAPR reduction, based on the information contained in the control signal 109 and related to how guard intervals are inserted. The guard interval insertion unit 120_1 outputs the signal 121_1 obtained after the guard interval insertion.

[0032] The guard interval inserter 120_2 receives input of the signal 119_2 obtained after the PAPR reduction and the control signal 109. The guard interval inserter 120_2 inserts the guard interval into the signal 119_2 obtained after the PAPR reduction, based on the information contained in the control signal 109 and related to how guard intervals are inserted. The guard interval inserter 120_2 outputs the signal 121_2 obtained after the guard interval insertion.

[0033] The first preamble insertion unit 122 receives input of the signal 121_1 obtained after the insertion of guard intervals, the signal 121_2 obtained after the insertion of guard intervals, and the first preamble transmission data 107. The first preamble inserter 122 generates a first preamble signal from the transmitted first preamble data 107 . The first preamble inserter 122 adds the first preamble to the signal 121_1 obtained after the guard interval insertion. The first preamble inserter 122 adds the first preamble to the signal 123_1 obtained after the addition of the first preamble and the signal 121_2 obtained after the insertion of guard intervals. The first preamble insertion unit 122 outputs the signal 123_2 obtained after the first preamble addition. Note that the first preamble signal may be added to both the 123_1 signal obtained after the addition of the first preamble and the 123_2 signal obtained after the addition of the first preamble, and may also be added to any of the 123_1 signal obtained after the addition of the first preamble and the signal 123_2 obtained after adding the first preamble. When the first preamble signal is added to one of the 123_1 signal and the 123_2 signal, the signal to which the first preamble is not added includes a null signal as a baseband signal in the section to which the signal to which the first preamble is added is added.

[0034] The processor 124_1 wireless receives input signal 123_1 received after adding the first preamble. The wireless processor 124_1 performs processing such as frequency conversion and gain on the signal 123_1. The processor 124_1 wireless outputs the transmitted signal 125_1. Then, the transmitted signal 125_1 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 126_1.

[0035] The processor 124_2 wireless receives input signal 123_2 received after adding the first preamble. The wireless processor 124_2 performs processing such as frequency conversion and gain on the signal 123_2. The processor 124_2 wireless outputs the transmitted signal 125_2. Then, the transmitted signal 125_2 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 126_2.

[0036] It should be noted that in the present exemplary embodiment, a MIMO transmission method using precoding and phase change, a MISO (multi-input, single output) transmission method using space-time block codes (or space-frequency block codes) are used. codes) or transmission method SISO (single input, single output) (or SIMO (single input, single output)), as described above (details are described below).

[0037] FIG. 2-6 are examples of frame configurations of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the above-described transmitter. The characteristics of each frame configuration are described below.

[0038] FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a first frame configuration. In FIG. 2, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0039] FIG. 2 illustrates the first preamble 201, the second preamble 202, data symbol group #1 203, data symbol group #2 204, and data symbol group #3 205.

[0040] First, data symbol groups are described below.

[0041] A group of data symbols may be allocated per video and/or audio stream. For example, the symbols for transmitting the first video and/or audio stream belong to data symbol group #1 (203), the symbols for transmitting the second video and/or audio stream belong to data symbol group #2 (204), and the symbols for transmitting the third video and /or audio stream belong to group #3 (205) data characters. This aspect is not limited to FIG. 2 and the same also applies to FIG. 3, 4, 5 and 6. This aspect is not limited to FIGS. 2 and the same also applies to FIG. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

[0042] Further, for example, a PLP (Physical Layer Pipeline) in a standard such as DVB-T2 (Digital Terrestrial Television Broadcast System Second Generation) may also be referred to as a group of data symbols. Thus, in FIG. 2, data symbol group #1 (203) may be referred to as PLP #1, data symbol group #2 (204) may be referred to as PLP #2, and data symbol group #3 (205) may be referred to as PLP #3. This aspect is not limited to FIG. 2 and the same also applies to FIG. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

[0043] The first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 include, for example, a symbol for performing frequency synchronization and time synchronization, an example of which is a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol having an in-phase I-quadrature Q-plane signal dot arrangement known in a transmitter and a receiver, a pilot symbol for estimating by a receiver a channel jitter, an example of which is a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol having a signal dot arrangement in the in-phase I-quadrature Q-plane known in the transmitter and receiver, the symbol for transmitting transmission method information of each group of data symbols (information for identifying the SISO method, MISO method, and MIMO method), a character for transmitting information related to the error correction code of each group of data symbols (for example, code length and coding rate) , a symbol for conveying information related to the mode for modulation of each data symbol (in the case of MISO method or MIMO method, since there are multiple streams, multiple modulation methods are indicated), a symbol for transmitting transmission method information of the first and second preambles, a symbol for transmitting information related to the error correction code of the first and second preambles, a symbol for transmitting method-related information for modulating the first and second preambles, a symbol for transmitting method-related information for inserting a pilot symbol, and a symbol for transmitting method-related information for suppressing PAPR. This aspect is not limited to FIG. 2 and the same also applies to FIG. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

[0044] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 2 are such that the group of data symbols is time-divided and transmitted.

[0045] It should be noted that in FIG. 2, a symbol for transmitting pilot symbol or control information may be inserted in a group of data symbols. Further, the data symbol group may also be a symbol group based on the MIMO-(transmission) method and the MISO-(transmission) method. As expected, the data character group may be a SISO-(SIMO-) method character group. In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple streams (s1 and s2, described below) are transmitted. In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple modulated signals are transmitted from multiple (different) antennas. Then, this aspect is not limited to FIG. 2 and the same also applies to FIG. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

[0046] FIG. 3. FIG. 3 illustrates an example of a second frame configuration. In FIG. 3, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis. It should be noted that elements identical to those in FIG. 2 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 3 and they work in the same way as shown in FIG. 2.

[0047] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 3 are such that the first preamble 301 and the second preamble 302 are inserted (temporarily) between data symbol group #2 (204) and data symbol group #3 (205). Thus, when a symbol group formed with "a first preamble, a second preamble, and a data symbol group" is referred to as a group, there is a first group that includes the first preamble, the second preamble, the data symbol group #1, and the data symbol group #2 , and the second group, which includes the first preamble, the second preamble, and the data symbol group #3, and the configurations of the data symbol group contained in the first group and the data symbol group contained in the second group are different.

[0048] In such a case, for example, video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #2 differ in video coding compressibility and/or audio, but may be identical "video and/or audio". Thus, there is such an advantage that the receiver can obtain the desired "video and/or audio" with high quality by a method no more complicated than selecting "to demodulate data symbol group #1 or to demodulate data symbol group #2", and that since the preamble may be set common in this case, the transmission efficiency of the control information may be improved.

[0049] Conversely, however, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol #2 may be different.

[0050] In addition, it becomes easy to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 to be identical to the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #2, and to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #3 to be different from the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (transmission method for transmitting data character group #2).

[0051] Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted into a group of data symbols. In this case, the insertion method of the pilot symbols differs according to the transmission method. It should be noted that since the number of modulated signals to be transmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease in transmission efficiency due to insertion of a pilot symbol can be prevented by collecting a group of data symbols per transmission method.

[0052] FIG. 4. FIG. 4 illustrates an example of a third frame configuration. In FIG. 4, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis. It should be noted that elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 2 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 4 and they work in a similar way as shown in FIG. 2.

[0053] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 4 are such that data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 undergo frequency division, and such that, in addition, "data symbol group #1 (401_1) and data symbol group #2 (402)" and "group #3 (403) data symbols" are subject to time division. Thus, groups of data symbols are transmitted by using frequency division and time division in combination.

[0054] FIG. 5. FIG. 5 illustrates a fourth frame configuration example. In FIG. 5, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis. It should be noted that elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 2 and 4 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 5 and they work in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 and 4.

[0055] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 5 are such that, as in the case of FIG. 4, data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 are subjected to frequency division, and such that, in addition, "data symbol group #1 (401_1) and data symbol group #2 (402)" and "group #3 ( 403) data symbols" are subject to time division. Thus, groups of data symbols are transmitted by using frequency division and time division in combination.

[0056] In addition, distinctive aspects in FIG. 5 are such that the first preamble 301 and the second preamble 302 are inserted (temporarily) between "data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol #2 (402)" and data symbol group #3 (403). Thus, when a symbol group formed with "a first preamble, a second preamble, and a data symbol group" is referred to as a group, there is a first group that includes the first preamble, the second preamble, the data symbol group #1, and the data symbol group #2 , and the second group, which includes the first preamble, the second preamble, and the data symbol group #3, and the configurations of the data symbol group contained in the first group and the data symbol group contained in the second group are different.

[0057] In such a case, for example, video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #2 differ in video coding compressibility and/or audio, but may be identical "video and/or audio". Thus, there is such an advantage that the receiver can obtain the desired "video and/or audio" with high quality by a method no more complicated than selecting "to demodulate data symbol group #1 or to demodulate data symbol group #2", and that since the preamble may be set common in this case, the transmission efficiency of the control information may be improved.

[0058] Conversely, however, video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol #2 may be different.

[0059] In addition, it becomes easy to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 to be identical to the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #2, and to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #3 to be different from the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (transmission method for transmitting data character group #2).

[0060] Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted into a group of data symbols. In this case, the insertion method of the pilot symbols differs according to the transmission method. It should be noted that since the number of modulated signals to be transmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease in transmission efficiency due to insertion of a pilot symbol can be prevented by collecting a group of data symbols per transmission method.

[0061] FIG. 6. FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a fifth frame configuration. In FIG. 6, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis. It should be noted that elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 2 and 4 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 6 and they work in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 and 4.

[0062] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 6 are such that, similarly to FIG. 4 and 5, data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 are subjected to frequency division, and such that, in addition, "data symbol group #1 (401_1) and data symbol group #2 (402)" and "group # 3 (403) data symbols" are subject to time division. Thus, groups of data symbols are transmitted by using frequency division and time division in combination.

[0063] In addition, distinctive aspects in FIG. 6 are such that a pilot symbol is inserted (temporarily) between "data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol #2 (402)" and data symbol group #3 (403).

[0064] In such a case, for example, video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #2 differ in video coding compressibility and/or audio, but may be identical "video and/or audio". Thus, there is such an advantage that the receiver can obtain the desired "video and/or audio" with high quality by a method no more complicated than selecting "to demodulate data symbol group #1 or to demodulate data symbol group #2", and that since the preamble may be set common in this case, the transmission efficiency of the control information may be improved.

[0065] Conversely, however, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol #2 may be different.

[0066] In addition, it becomes easy to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 to be identical to the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #2, and to set the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #3 to be different from the transmission method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (transmission method for transmitting data character group #2).

[0067] Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted into a group of data symbols. In this case, the insertion method of the pilot symbols differs according to the transmission method. It should be noted that since the number of modulated signals to be transmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease in transmission efficiency due to insertion of a pilot symbol can be prevented by collecting a group of data symbols per transmission method.

[0068] It should be noted that in the case of a MISO method or a MIMO method, a pilot symbol is inserted into each modulated signal to be transmitted from each transmit antenna.

[0069] Then, insertion of the pilot symbol 601 as illustrated in FIG. 6 allows the receiver to perform highly accurate channel estimation to detect waves and demodulate each group of data symbols. In addition, when the methods for transmitting data symbols are switched, the receiver must adjust the gain of the received signal suitable for the transmitter. However, it can be advantageous that the gain can be easily adjusted by the pilot symbol 601.

[0070] It should be noted that in FIG. 4, 5 and 6, for example, video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #2 differ in video and/or audio coding compressibility. , but may be identical "video and/or audio". Thus, there is such an advantage that the receiver can obtain the desired "video and/or audio" with high quality by a method no more complicated than selecting "to demodulate data symbol group #1 or to demodulate data symbol group #2", and that since the preamble may be set common in this case, the transmission efficiency of the control information may be improved. Conversely, however, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with data symbol #2 may be different.

[0071] FIG. 4, 5, and 6 illustrate examples in which a time-divisioned data symbol group is arranged after a frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement. The frequency division-divisioned data symbol group may be arranged after the time-divisioned data symbol group. In this case, in the example of FIG. 5, a first preamble and a second preamble are inserted between the time-divisioned data symbol group and the frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, characters other than the first preamble and the second preamble may be inserted. Then, in the example of FIG. 6, a pilot symbol is inserted between the time-divisioned data symbol group and the frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, characters other than the pilot character may be inserted.

[0072] Distinguishing aspects of the present exemplary embodiment are described below.

[0073] As described above, the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6 have corresponding advantages. Therefore, the transmitter selects any of the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6 according to compressibility and data (stream) type, transmission method combination method, and service method to be provided to the terminal, and transmits symbols such as control information, pilot symbols, and data symbols.

[0074] In order to implement the above, the transmitter (FIG. 1) may include "frame configuration related information" to transmit frame configuration related information to the receiver (terminal) in the first preamble or the second preamble.

[0075] For example, in the case where the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 2, when the three bits v0, v1 and v2 are allocated as "frame configuration related information", the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information" .

[0076] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 3, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0077] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 4, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0078] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0079] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 0, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0080] The receiver can then recognize the frame configuration structure of the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter from the "frame configuration related information".

[0081] As described above, the data symbol group is a symbol of any of the SISO (or SIMO) method, MISO method, and MIMO method. The MISO method and the MIMO method are specifically described below.

[0082] The MISO (transmission) method using space-time block codes (space-frequency block codes) is described below.

[0083] The following describes the configuration in the case where the signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 implements a transmission method using space-time block codes, with reference to FIG. 7.

[0084] The mapping unit 702 receives input of a data signal 701 (data obtained after error correction encoding) and a control signal 706. The mapping unit 702 performs mapping based on the information contained in the control signal 706 related to the modulation method. The display unit 702 outputs the signal 703 obtained after the display. For example, the signal 703 obtained after mapping is arranged in the order s0, s1, s2, s3,..., s(2i), s(2i+1),...,. (i is an integer equal to or greater than 0).

[0085] The MISO (multi-input, multiple-output) processor 704 receives the input of the post-mapped signal 703 and the control signal 706. The MISO processor 704 outputs the post-MISO signals 705A and 705B in case the control signal 706 instructs transmission via the MISO method. For example, signal 705A obtained after MISO processing is s0, s1, s2, s3,..., s(2i), s(2i+1),..., and signal 705B obtained after MISO processing , is -s1*, s0*, -s3*, s2*,..., -s(2i+1)*, s(2i)*,...,. Note that "*" means the complex conjugate (for example, s0* is the complex conjugate of s0).

[0086] In this case, the signals 705A and 705B obtained after the MISO processing correspond to the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing in FIG. 1 and modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing, respectively. Note that the space-time block code method is not limited to the above.

[0087] Then, the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna 126_1. In addition, the modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna 126_2.

[0088] FIG. 8 is a configuration in a case where a transmission method using space-time block codes other than the configuration in FIG. 7.

[0089] The mapping unit 702 receives input of a data signal 701 (data obtained after error correction encoding) and a control signal 706. The mapping unit 702 performs transformation based on the information contained in the control signal 706 related to the modulation method. The display unit 702 outputs the signal 703 obtained after the display. For example, the signal 703 obtained after mapping is arranged in the order s0, s1, s2, s3,..., s(2i), s(2i+1),...,. (i is an integer equal to or greater than 0).

[0090] The MISO (multi-input, multiple-output) processor 704 receives the input of the post-mapped signal 703 and the control signal 706. The MISO processor 704 outputs the post-MISO signals 705A and 705B in case the control signal 706 instructs transmission via the MISO method. For example, signal 705A obtained after MISO processing is s0, -s1*, s2, -s3*,..., s(2i), -s(2i+1)*,..., and signal 705B , obtained after MISO processing, is s1, s0*, s3, s2*,..., s(2i+1), s(2i)*,...,. It should be noted that "*" means complex conjugate number. For example, s0* is the complex conjugate of s0.

[0091] In this case, the signals 705A and 705B obtained after the MISO processing correspond to the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing in FIG. 1 and modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing, respectively. Note that the space-time block code method is not limited to the above.

[0092] Then, the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna 126_1. In addition, the modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna 126_2.

[0093] The following describes a MIMO method to which precoding, phase change, and power change are applied as an example of a MIMO method. However, a method for transmitting a plurality of streams from a plurality of antennas is not limited to this method, and the present exemplary embodiment may also be performed by another method.

[0094] The following describes the configuration in the case where the signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 implements a transmission method using a MIMO method with reference to FIG. 9-17.

[0095] The encoder 1102 in FIG. 9 receives input of information 1101 and a control signal 1112. The encoder 1102 performs encoding based on the information of the coding rate and the code length (block length) contained in the control signal 1112. The encoder 1102 outputs encoded data 1103.

[0096] The display module 1104 receives input of encoded data 1103 and a control signal 1112. It is then assumed that the control signal 1112 indicates transmission of two streams as the transmission method. In addition, it is assumed that the control signal 1112 indicates the modulation method α and the modulation method β as the modulation methods of the two streams, respectively. Note that the α modulation method is a modulation method for modulating x-bit data, and the β modulation method is a modulation method for modulating y-bit data. For example, the modulation method is a modulation method for modulating 4-bit data in the case of 16QAM (16-point quadrature amplitude modulation) and a modulation method for modulating 6-bit data in the case of 64QAM (64-point quadrature amplitude modulation).

[0097] Next, the mapping module 1104 modulates the x-bit data x+y-bit data by modulation method α, generates and outputs the baseband signal s ₁ (t) 1105A, and also modulates the remaining y-bit data by modulation method β, and outputs the baseband signal s ₂ (t) 1105B (Note that Fig. 9 illustrates one display module, but as another configuration, a display module for generating s ₁ (t) and a display module for generating s ₂ (t) In this case, the encoded data 1103 is sorted into a mapper to generate s ₁ (t) and to a mapper to generate s ₂ (t)).

[0098] It should be noted that s ₁ (t) and s ₂ (t) are expressed in terms of complex numbers (However, s ₁ (t) and s ₂ (t) can be any of the complex numbers and actual numbers), and t represents time. It should be noted that when a multi-carrier transmission method such as OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) is used, each of s ₁ and s ₂ can also be considered as a function of frequency f, similarly to s ₁ (f) and s ₂ (f), or as a function of time t and frequency f, similarly to s ₁ (t, f) and s ₂ (t, f).

[0099] The baseband signal, precoding matrix, phase change, and the like are described below. as a function of time t, but can be considered as a function of frequency f and a function of time t and frequency f.

[0100] Therefore, a case is also envisaged in which a baseband signal, a precoding matrix, a phase change, and the like. are described as a function of the number i of the character. However, in this case, the baseband signal, the precoding matrix, the phase change, and the like. should only be considered as a function of time t, a function of frequency f, and a function of time t and frequency f. Thus, the symbol and the baseband signal may be generated and arranged in the direction of the time axis, and may be formed and arranged in the direction of the frequency axis. In addition, the symbol and the baseband signal may be formed and arranged in the time axis direction and the frequency axis direction.

[0101] Power change module 1106A (power control module 1106A) receives input of baseband signal s ₁ (t) 1105A and control signal 1112. Power change module 1106A sets the actual number P ₁ based on control signal 1112. Power change module 1106A outputs P ₁ xs ₁ (t) as the signal 1107A received after the power change. It should be noted that P ₁ is assumed to be an actual number, but may be a complex number.

[0102] Similarly, power change module 1106B (power control module 1106B) receives input of baseband signal s ₂ (t) 1105B and control signal 512. Power change module 1106B sets the actual number P ₂ . The power change module 1106B outputs P2 xs ₂ (t) as the signal 1107B received after the power change. It should be noted that P ₂ is assumed to be an actual number, but may be a complex number.

[0103] The weight synthesizer 1108 receives input of the signal 1107A obtained after the power change, the signal 1107B obtained after the power change, and the control signal 1112. The weight synthesizer 1108 specifies a precoding matrix F (or F(i)) based on the control signal 1112. The weight synthesizer 1108 performs the following arithmetic operation on the condition that the slot number (symbol number) is equal to i.

[0104] Equation 1

[0105] Here, a(i), b(i), c(i), and d(i) may be expressed in terms of complex numbers (or may be actual numbers), and three or more of a(i), b(i ), c(i), and d(i) must not be 0 (zero). Note that the precoding matrix may or may not be a function of i. Thereafter, when the precoding matrix is a function of i, the precoding matrices are switched according to the slot number (symbol number).

[0106] Then, the weights synthesizer 1108 outputs u ₁ (i) in equation (1) as the post-weights synthesis signal 1109A. The weights synthesizer 1108 outputs u ₂ (i) in equation (1) as the signal 1109B obtained after weights synthesis.

[0107] The power change unit 1110A receives an input of the signal 1109A (u ₁ (i)) obtained after weight synthesis and the control signal 512. The power change unit 1110A sets the actual number Q ₁ based on the control signal 1112. The power change unit 1110A outputs Q ₁ xu ₁ (t) as signal 1111A (z ₁ (i)) obtained after power change (note that Q ₁ is supposed to be an actual number, but may be a complex number).

[0108] Similarly, power change module 1110B receives an input of signal 1109B (u ₂ (i)) obtained after weight synthesis and control signal 1112. Power change module 1110B sets the actual number Q ₂ based on control signal 512. Change module 1110B power outputs Q ₂ xu ₂ (t) as signal 1111B (z ₂ (i)) obtained after power change (note that Q ₂ is supposed to be an actual number, but may be a complex number).

[0109] Therefore, the following equation is satisfied.

[0110] Equation 2

[0111] The following describes a method for transmitting two streams different from the transmission method in FIG. 9 with reference to FIG. 10. It should be noted that the elements that work in the same way as shown in FIG. 9 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 10.

[0112] The phase change module 1161 receives input of the signal 1109B obtained after the synthesis of the weights u ₂ (i) in equation (1) and the control signal 1112. The phase change module 1161 changes the phase of the signal 1109B obtained after the synthesis of the weights u ₂ ( i) in equation (1), based on the control signal 1112. Therefore, the signal obtained after the phase change of the signal 1109B obtained after the synthesis of the weight coefficients u ₂ (i) in equation (1) is expressed by e ^jθ(i) xu ₂ (i). The phase change module 1161 outputs e ^jθ(i) xu ₂ (i) as the signal 1162 obtained after the phase change (j is the imaginary number unit). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as θ(i).

[0113] Next, power change modules 1110A and 1110B in FIG. 10 change the power of the input signal. Therefore, output z ₁ (i) and output z ₂ (i) of the respective power change modules 1110A and 1110B in FIG. 10 are expressed by the following equation.

[0114] Equation 3

[0115] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing Equation (3), FIG. 11 as a configuration different from that in FIG. 10. The difference between FIG. 10 and 11 is that the power change unit and the phase change units are switched in order. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0116] Equation 4

[0117] When the value θ(i) of the phase to be changed in Equation (3) and Equation (4) is set such that, for example, θ(i+1)-θ(i) is a fixed value, the receiving device is very likely to receive good data reception quality in a radio propagation environment in which the direct wave is dominant. However, how to assign the value θ(i) to the phase to be changed is not limited to this example.

[0118] The case in which there is some (or all) of the power change units is described as an example with reference to FIG. 9-11. However, a case may also be considered in which some power change modules do not exist.

[0119] For example, when there is neither power change unit 1106A (power control unit 1106A) nor power change unit 1106B (power control unit 1106B) in FIG. 9, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0120] Equation 5

[0121] In addition, when there is neither a power change unit 1110A (power control unit 1110A) nor a power change unit 1110B (power control unit 1110B) in FIG. 9, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0122] Equation 6

[0123] In addition, when there is neither a power change module 1106A (power control module 1106A), nor a power change module 1106B (power control module 1106B), nor a power change module 1110A (power control module 1110A), nor a power change module 1110B ( power control module 1110B) in FIG. 9, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0124] Equation 7

[0125] In addition, when there is neither a power change unit 1106A (power control unit 1106A) nor a power change unit 1106B (power control unit 1106B) in FIG. 10 or 11, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0126] Equation 8

[0127] In addition, when there is neither a power change unit 1110A (power control unit 1110A) nor a power change unit 1110B (power control unit 1110B) in FIG. 10 or 11, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0128] Equation 9

[0129] In addition, when there is neither a power change module 1106A (power control module 1106A), nor a power change module 1106B (power control module 1106B), nor a power change module 1110A (power control module 1110A), nor a power change module 1110B ( power control module 1110B) in FIG. 10 or 11, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed as follows.

[0130] Equation 10

[0131] The following describes a method for transmitting two streams different from the transmission methods in FIG. 9-11 with reference to FIGS. 12. It should be noted that the elements that work in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-11 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 12 and they are not described.

[0132] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 12 are such that the phase change module 1151 is inserted.

[0133] The phase change module 1151 receives input of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B and control signal 1112. Phase change module 1151 changes the phase of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, the phase change value is e ^jλ(i) (j is the unit of the imaginary number). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as λ(i).

[0134] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(10), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 12 are expressed by the following equation.

[0135] Equation 11

[0136] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing Equation (11), a switching configuration of the power change unit 1106B and the phase change unit 1151 in order is provided as a configuration different from that in FIG. 12. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0137] Equation 12

[0138] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (11) and z ₁ (i) of equation (12) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (11) and z ₂ (i) of equation (12) are equal .

[0139] FIG. 13 is another configuration that can implement the same processing as in FIG. 12. It should be noted that the elements that work in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-12 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 13 and they are not described. In such a case, the difference between FIG. 12 and 13 is that the order in which the power change unit 1110B and the phase change unit 1161 are switched in FIG. 12 is the order in FIG. 13. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change.

[0140] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(12), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 13 are expressed by the following equation.

[0141] Equation 13

[0142] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing Equation (13), a switching configuration of the power change unit 1106B and the phase change unit 1151 in order is provided as a configuration different from that in FIG. 13. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0143] Equation 14

[0144] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (11), z ₁ (i) of equation (12), z ₁ (i) of equation (13), and z ₁ (i) of equation (14) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (11), z ₂ (i) of equation (12), z ₂ (i) of equation (13), and z ₂ (i) of equation (14) are equal.

[0145] The following describes a method for transmitting two streams different from the transmission methods in FIG. 9-13 with reference to FIGS. 14. It should be noted that elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-13 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 14 and they are not described.

[0146] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 14 are such that a phase change module 1181 and a phase change module 1151 are inserted.

[0147] The phase change module 1151 receives input of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B and control signal 1112. Phase change module 1151 changes the phase of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, the phase change value is e ^jλ(i) (j is the unit of the imaginary number). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as λ(i).

[0148] In addition, the phase change module 1181 receives input of the baseband signal s ₁ (i) 1105A and the control signal 1112. The phase change module 1181 changes the phase of the baseband signal s ₁ (i) 1105A based on the control signal 1112 In this case, the phase change value is e ^jσ(i) (j is the unit of the imaginary number). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as σ(i).

[0149] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(14), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 14 are expressed by the following equation.

[0150] Equation 15

[0151] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing equation (15), a switching configuration of the power change module 1106B and the phase change module 1151 in order, and the switching of the power change module 1106A and the phase change module 1181 in order, are provided as a configuration different from configuration in Fig. 14. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0152] Equation 16

[0153] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (15) and z ₁ (i) of equation (16) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (15) and z ₂ (i) of equation (16) are equal .

[0154] FIG. 15 is another configuration that can implement the same processing as in FIG. 14. It should be noted that elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-14 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 15 and they are not described. In such a case, the difference between FIG. 14 and 15 is that the order in which the power change unit 1110B and the phase change unit 1161 are switched in FIG. 14 is the order in FIG. 15 (the functions of changing the power and changing the phases themselves do not change).

[0155] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(16), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 15 are expressed by the following equation.

[0156] Equation 17

[0157] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing Equation (17), a switching configuration of the power change module 1106B and the phase change module 1151 in order, and the switching of the power change module 1106A and the phase change module 1181 in order are provided as a configuration different from configuration in Fig. 15. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0158] Equation 18

[0159] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (15), z ₁ (i) of equation (16), z ₁ (i) of equation (17), and z ₁ (i) of equation (18) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (15), z ₂ (i) of equation (16), z ₂ (i) of equation (17), and z ₂ (i) of equation (18) are equal.

[0160] The following describes a method for transmitting two streams different from the transmission methods in FIG. 9-15 with reference to FIGS. 16. It should be noted that elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-15 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 16 and they are not described.

[0161] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 16 are such that a phase change module 1181, a phase change module 1151, a phase change module 1110A, and a phase change module 1110B are inserted.

[0162] The phase change module 1151 receives input of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B and control signal 1112. Phase change module 1151 changes the phase of baseband signal s ₂ (i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, the phase change value is e ^jλ(i) (j is the unit of the imaginary number). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as λ(i).

[0163] In addition, the phase change module 1181 receives input of the baseband signal s ₁ (i) 1105A and the control signal 1112. The phase change module 1181 changes the phase of the baseband signal s ₁ (i) 1105A based on the control signal 1112 In this case, the phase change value is e ^jσ(i) (j is the unit of the imaginary number). It should be noted that the value of the phase to be changed is the part differing as a function of i, such as σ(i).

[0164] The phase change module 1161 performs a phase change for the input signal. The value of the phase change in this case is equal to θ(i). Similarly, the phase change module 1191 performs a phase change on the input signal. The value of the phase change in this case is equal to ω(i).

[0165] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(18), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 16 are expressed by the following equation.

[0166] Equation 19

[0167] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing Equation (19), a switching configuration of the power change module 1106B and the phase change module 1151 in order, and the switching of the power change module 1106A and the phase change module 1181 in order are provided as a configuration different from configuration in Fig. 16. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0168] Equation 20

[0169] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (19) and z ₁ (i) of equation (20) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (19) and z ₂ (i) of equation (20) are equal .

[0170] FIG. 17 is another configuration that can implement the same processing as in FIG. 16. It should be noted that the elements that work in the same way as shown in FIG. 9-16 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 17 and they are not described. In such a case, the difference between FIG. 16 and 17 is that the order in which the power change unit 1110B and the phase change unit 1161 are switched in FIG. 14 and the order in which the power change unit 1110A and the phase change unit 1191 are switched in FIG. 14 is the order in FIG. 17. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change.

[0171] Then, when considered similarly to equations (1)-(20), z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i), which are the output signals in FIG. 17 are expressed by the following equation.

[0172] Equation 21

[0173] It should be noted that, as a method for implementing equation (21), a switching configuration of the power change module 1106B and the phase change module 1151 in order, and the switching of the power change module 1106A and the phase change module 1181 in order are provided as a configuration different from configuration in Fig. 17. The power change and phase change functions themselves do not change. In this case, z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0174] Equation 22

[0175] As expected, z ₁ (i) of equation (19), z ₁ (i) of equation (20), z ₁ (i) of equation (21), and z ₁ (i) of equation (22) are equal, and z ₂ (i) of equation (19), z ₂ (i) of equation (20), z ₂ (i) of equation (21), and z ₂ (i) of equation (22) are equal.

[0176] The matrix F for weight synthesis (precoding) has been described above. However, each exemplary embodiment herein can also be performed by using the precoding matrix F (or F(i)) described below.

[0177] Equation 23

[0178] or:

[0179] Equation 24

[0180] or:

[0181] Equation 25

[0182] or:

[0183] Equation 26

[0184] or:

[0185] Equation 27

[0186] or:

[0187] Equation 28

[0188] or:

[0189] Equation 29

[0190] or:

[0191] Equation 30

[0192] It should be noted that in equation (23), equation (24), equation (25), equation (26), equation (27), equation (28), equation (29) and equation (30), α can be a real number or may be an imaginary number, and β may be a real number or may be an imaginary number. However, α is not equal to 0 (zero). In this case, too, β is not equal to 0 (zero).

Alternatively:

[0193] Equation 31

[0194] or:

[0195] Equation 32

[0196] or:

[0197] Equation 33

[0198] or:

[0199] Equation 34

[0200] or:

[0201] Equation 35

[0202] or:

[0203] Equation 36

[0204] or:

[0205] Equation 37

[0206] or:

[0207] Equation 38

[0208] It should be noted that in equation (31), equation (33), equation (35) and equation (37), β may be an actual number or may be an imaginary number. However, β is not equal to 0 (zero).

Alternatively:

[0209] Equation 39

[0210] or:

[0211] Equation 40

[0212] or:

[0213] Equation 41

[0214] or:

[0215] Equation 42

[0216] or:

[0217] Equation 43

[0218] or:

[0219] Equation 44

[0220] or:

[0221] Equation 45

[0222] or:

[0223] Equation 46

[0224] or:

[0225] Equation 47

[0226] or:

[0227] Equation 48

[0228] or:

[0229] Equation 49

[0230] or:

[0231] Equation 50

[0232] Here, each of θ1 ₁ (i), θ2 ₁ (i), and λ(i) is a function of i, λ is a fixed value, α may be an actual number or may be an imaginary number, and β may be a real number or may be an imaginary number. However, α is not equal to 0 (zero). In this case, too, β is not equal to 0 (zero). It should be noted that i indicates either time or frequency, or indicates both time and frequency.

[0233] Alternatively:

[0234] Equation 51

[0235] or:

[0236] Equation 52

[0237] Equation 53

[0238] or:

[0239] Equation 54

[0240] or:

[0241] Equation 55

[0242] Here, θ(i) is a function of i, and β may be an actual number or may be an imaginary number. However, β is also not equal to 0 (zero). It should be noted that i represents either time or frequency, or indicates both time and frequency.

[0243] In addition, each exemplary embodiment herein can also be performed by using a precoding matrix other than these matrices.

[0244] In addition, a method can be provided for performing precoding without performing the above-described phase change in order to generate a modulated signal and transmit the modulated signal from a transmitter. In this case, an example can be considered in which z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are expressed by the following equation.

[0245] Equation 56

[0246] Equation 57

[0247] Equation 58

[0248] Equation 59

[0249] Equation 60

[0250] Then z ₁ (i) obtained in FIG. 9-17, z ₁ i) equation (56), z ₁ (i) equation (57), z ₁ (i) equation (58), z ₁ (i) equation (59) or z ₁ (i) equation ( 60) corresponds to the modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signal processing in FIG. 1 and z ₂ (i) obtained in FIG. 9-17, z ₂ (i) equation (56), z ₂ (i) equation (57), z ₂ (i) equation (58), z ₂ (i) equation (59) or z ₂ (i) equation (60) corresponds to modulated signal 2 (113_2) in FIG. 1.

[0251] FIG. 18A-22 illustrate method examples for arranging z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) formed in FIG. 9-17.

[0252] Part (A) of FIG. 18 illustrates a method for arranging z ₁ (i) and (B) of FIG. 18 illustrates a method for arranging z ₂ (i). In each of (A) and (B) in FIG. 18, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency.

[0253] Part (A) of FIG. 18. First, when z ₁ (0), z ₁ (1), z ₁ (2), z ₁ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed:

z ₁ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₁ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 1,

z ₁ (2) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

...

z ₁ (10) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₁ (11) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 2,

z ₁ (12) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2, and

....

[0254] Similarly, when z ₂ (0), z ₂ (1), z ₂ (2), z ₂ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed in (B) of FIG. 18:

z ₂ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₂ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 1,

z ₂ (2) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

...

z ₂ (10) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₂ (11) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 2,

z ₂ (12) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2, and

....

[0255] In this case, z ₁ (a) and z ₂ (a) in the case of i=a are transmitted from the same frequency and from the same time. In such a case, FIG. 18 illustrates examples of a case in which the generated z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are preferably arranged in the direction of the frequency axis.

[0256] Part (A) of FIG. 19 illustrates the method for arranging z ₁ (i) and (B) of FIG. 19 illustrates a method for arranging z ₂ (i). In each of (A) and (B) in FIG. 19, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency.

[0257] Part (A) of FIG. 19. First, when z ₁ (0), z ₁ (1), z ₁ (2), z ₁ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed:

z ₁ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₁ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 2,

z ₁ (2) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

...

z ₁ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₁ (11) is assembled on carrier 7 and at time 1,

z ₁ (12) is assembled at carrier 8 and at time 2, and

....

[0258] Similarly, when z ₂ (0), z ₂ (1), z ₂ (2), z ₂ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed in (B) of FIG. 19:

z ₂ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₂ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 2,

z ₂ (2) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

...

z ₂ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₂ (11) is assembled at carrier 7 and at time 1,

z ₂ (12) is assembled at carrier 8 and at time 2, and

....

[0259] In this case, z ₁ (a) and z ₂ (a) in the case of i=a are transmitted from the same frequency and from the same time. In such a case, FIG. 19 illustrates examples of a case in which the generated z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are randomly arranged in the directions of the frequency axis and the time axis.

[0260] Part (A) of FIG. 20 illustrates a method for arranging z ₁ (i) and (B) of FIG. 20 illustrates a method for arranging z ₂ (i). In each of (A) and (B) in FIG. 20, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency.

[0261] Part (A) of FIG. 20. First, when z ₁ (0), z ₁ (1), z ₁ (2), z ₁ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed:

z ₁ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₁ (1) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

z ₁ (2) is assembled at carrier 4 and at time 1,

...

z ₁ (10) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₁ (11) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₁ (12) is assembled at carrier 4 and at time 2, and

....

[0262] Similarly, when z ₂ (0), z ₂ (1), z ₂ (2), z ₂ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed in (B) of FIG. 20:

z ₂ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₂ (1) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 1,

z ₂ (2) is assembled at carrier 4 and at time 1,

...

z ₂ (10) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₂ (11) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₂ (12) is assembled at carrier 4 and at time 2, and

....

[0263] In this case, z ₁ (a) and z ₂ (a) in the case of i=a are transmitted from the same frequency and from the same time. In such a case, FIG. 20 illustrates examples of a case in which the generated z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are preferably arranged in the direction of the frequency axis.

[0264] Part (A) of FIG. 21 illustrates a method for arranging z ₁ (i) and (B) of FIG. 21 illustrates a method for arranging z ₂ (i). In each of (A) and (B) in FIG. 21, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency.

[0265] Part (A) of FIG. 21. First, when z ₁ (0), z ₁ (1), z ₁ (2), z ₁ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed:

z ₁ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₁ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 1,

z ₁ (2) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

...

z ₁ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₁ (11) is assembled at carrier 3 and at time 2,

z ₁ (12) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 3, and

....

[0266] Similarly, when z ₂ (0), z ₂ (1), z ₂ (2), z ₂ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed in (B) of FIG. 21:

z ₂ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₂ (1) is assembled at carrier 1 and at time 1,

z ₂ (2) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

...

z ₂ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 2,

z ₂ (11) is assembled on carrier 3 and at time 2,

z ₂ (12) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 3, and

....

[0267] In this case, z ₁ (a) and z ₂ (a) in the case of i=a are transmitted from the same frequency and from the same time. In such a case, FIG. 21 illustrates examples of a case in which the generated z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are arranged in the directions of the time and frequency axis.

[0268] Part (A) of FIG. 22 illustrates a method for arranging z ₁ (i) and (B) of FIG. 22 illustrates a method for arranging z ₂ (i). In each of (A) and (B) in FIG. 22, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency.

[0269] Part (A) of FIG. 22. First, when z ₁ (0), z ₁ (1), z ₁ (2), z ₁ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed:

z ₁ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₁ (1) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₁ (2) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 3,

...

z ₁ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 3,

z ₁ (11) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 4,

z ₁ (12) is assembled at carrier 3 and at time 1, and

....

[0270] Similarly, when z ₂ (0), z ₂ (1), z ₂ (2), z ₂ (3),..., corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3,..., are formed in (B) of FIG. 22:

z ₂ (0) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 1,

z ₂ (1) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 2,

z ₂ (2) is assembled at carrier 0 and at time 3,

...

z ₂ (10) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 3,

z ₂ (11) is assembled at carrier 2 and at time 4,

z ₂ (12) is assembled at carrier 3 and at time 1, and

....

[0271] In this case, z ₁ (a) and z ₂ (a) in the case of i=a are transmitted from the same frequency and from the same time. In such a case, FIG. 22 illustrates examples of a case in which the formed z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) are preferably arranged in the direction of the time axis.

[0272] The transmitter may arrange symbols by any of the methods in FIG. 18-22 and character arrangement methods other than those in FIG. 18-22. Fig. 18-22 are only examples of character arrangements.

[0273] FIG. 23 is a configuration example of a receiver (terminal) that receives a modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1.

[0274] FIG. 23, an OFDM associated processor 2303_X receives received signal input 2302_X received at antenna 2301_X. The OFDM-associated processor 2303_X performs signal processing on the receive side for the OFDM method. The OFDM-related processor 2303_X outputs the signal 2304_X obtained after signal processing. Similarly, an OFDM associated processor 2303_Y receives an input of a received signal 2302_Y received at antenna 2301_Y. The OFDM associated processor 2303_Y performs signal processing on the receiving side for the OFDM method. The OFDM-related processor 2303_Y outputs the signal 2304_Y obtained after signal processing.

[0275] The first preamble detector/decoder 2311 receives input of signals 2304_X and 2304_Y obtained after signal processing. The first preamble detector/decoder 2311 performs signal detection and time-frequency synchronization by detecting the first preamble, and simultaneously obtains the control information contained in the first preamble by performing demodulation and error correction decoding, and outputs the first preamble control information 2312.

[0276] The demodulator 2313 of the second preambles receives the input of signals 2304_X and 2304_Y obtained after signal processing, and control information 2312 of the first preamble. The demodulator 2313 of the second preambles performs signal processing based on the control information 2312 of the first preamble. The demodulator 2313 of the second preambles performs demodulation (decoding with error correction). The demodulator 2313 of the second preambles outputs control information 2314 of the second preamble.

[0277] The control information generator 2315 receives input of the first preamble control information 2312 and the second preamble control information 2314. The control information generator 2315 packetizes the control information (related to the receive operation) and outputs the control information as a control signal 2316. Then, the control signal 2316 is input to each module, as illustrated in FIG. 23.

[0278] The modulated signal z ₁ channel jitter estimation unit 2305_1 receives input of the signal 2304_X obtained after signal processing and the control signal 2316. The modulated signal z ₁ channel jitter estimation unit 2305_1 estimates the channel jitter between the antenna from which the transmitter transmits the modulated signal z ₁ and the reception antenna 2301_X by using the pilot symbol and the like included in the signal 2304_X obtained after signal processing, and outputs the channel estimation signal 2306_1.

[0279] Modulated signal z ₂ channel jitter estimation unit 2305_2 receives input of signal 2304_X obtained after signal processing and control signal 2316. Modulated signal z ₂ channel jitter estimation unit 2305_2 estimates the channel jitter between the antenna from which the transmitter transmits the modulated signal z ₂ and the receiving antenna 2301_X by using the pilot symbol and the like contained in the signal 2304_X obtained after signal processing, and outputs the channel estimation signal 2306_2.

[0280] The modulated signal z ₁ channel jitter estimation unit 2307_1 receives input of the signal 2304_Y obtained after signal processing and the control signal 2316. The modulated signal z ₁ channel jitter estimation unit 2307_1 estimates the channel jitter between the antenna from which the transmitter transmits the modulated signal z ₁ and the receiving antenna 2301_Y by using the pilot symbol and the like included in the signal 2304_Y obtained after signal processing, and outputs the channel estimation signal 2308_1.

[0281] The modulated signal z ₂ channel jitter estimation unit 2307_2 receives input of the signal 2304_Y obtained after signal processing and the control signal 2316. The modulated signal z ₂ channel jitter estimation unit 2307_2 estimates the channel jitter between the antenna from which the transmitter transmits the modulated signal z ₂ and the receiving antenna 2301_Y by using the pilot symbol and the like contained in the signal 2304_Y obtained after signal processing, and outputs the channel estimation signal 2308_2.

[0282] The signal processor 2309 receives the input of the signals 2306_1, 2306_2, 2308_1, 2308_2, 2304_X, and 2304_Y and the control signal 2316. The signal processor 2309 performs demodulation and decoding processing based on information such as transmission method, modulation method, error correction coding method , a coding rate for error correction coding, and an error correction code block size contained in the control signal 2316. The signal processor 2309 outputs received data 2310. In this case, other wave detection (demodulation) and decoding is performed based on the above-described transmission method.

[0283] It should be noted that the receiver extracts the required symbol from the control signal 2316 and performs demodulation (including signal demultiplexing and detection of signal transmission waves) and error correction decoding. In addition, the configuration of the receiving device is not limited to this configuration.

[0284] As described above, it is advantageous that flexible video information and flexible broadcast service can be provided to a receiver (viewer) by allowing the transmitter to select any frame configuration from the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6. In addition, such advantages as described above are provided in the frame configurations of FIG. 2-6, respectively. Therefore, the transmitter may use one frame configuration from the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6, in which case the effect described above can be obtained.

[0285] In addition, when the transmitter selects any of the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6, for example, when a transmitter is installed in a certain area, the frame configurations can be switched by setting any of the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6 when the transmitter is set up and regularly parsing the job, or the method for selecting frame configurations in FIG. 2-6 per frame transmission. As for the frame configuration selection method, any selection can be made.

[0286] It should be noted that in the frame configurations of FIG. 2-6, another symbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol and a null symbol (the in-phase symbol component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)), may be inserted in the first preamble. Similarly, a symbol such as a pilot symbol and a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)) may be inserted in the second preamble. In addition, the preamble is configured with a first preamble and a second preamble. However, the preamble configuration is not limited to this configuration. The preamble may be configured with only the first preamble (first preamble group) or may be configured with two or more preambles (preamble groups). It should be noted that with respect to the preamble configuration, the same also applies to the frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments.

[0287] The data symbol group is then indicated in the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6. However, another symbol may be inserted, examples of which include a pilot symbol, a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)) and the control information symbol. It should be noted that in this respect, the same also applies to frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments.

[0288] In addition, another symbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol, a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)), a control information symbol, and a data symbol, may be inserted in the pilot the symbol in Fig. 6. It should be noted that in this regard, the same also applies to frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments.

[0289] Second exemplary embodiment

The first exemplary embodiment describes the case in which the transmitter selects any of the frame configurations in FIG. 2-6, or the case in which any of the frames in FIG. 2-6. The present exemplary embodiment describes an example of a method for configuring the first preamble and the second preamble described in the first exemplary embodiment in the transmission device described in the first exemplary embodiment.

[0290] As described in the first exemplary embodiment, the transmitter (FIG. 1) may include "frame configuration related information" for transmitting frame configuration related information to the receiving device (terminal) in the first preamble or the second preamble to convey "frame configuration related information".

[0291] For example, in the case where the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 2, when the three bits v0, v1 and v2 are allocated as "frame configuration related information", the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information" .

[0292] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 3, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0293] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 4, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0294] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0295] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 0, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0296] The receiver can recognize the frame configuration structure of the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter from the "frame configuration related information".

[0297] Additionally, the transmitter (FIG. 1) transmits control information associated with a method for transmitting each group of data symbols, control information associated with a method for modulating each group of data symbols (or a set of modulation methods), and control information associated with with a code length (block length) and an encoding rate of an error correction code to be used in each data symbol group, and further transmits information related to a method for configuring the data symbol group in each frame configuration. An exemplary method for configuring these pieces of control information is described below.

[0298] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 2 or 3, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 0, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, the control information associated with the method for transmitting the data symbol group #j is a(j, 0) and a(j, 1).

[0299] In this case, when the method for transmitting the data symbol group #(j=K) is single stream transmission (SISO-(SIMO-)transmission), the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 and passes a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0300] When the method for transmitting the data symbol group #(j=K) is space-time block codes (or space-frequency block codes) (MISO transmission), the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=1 and a (K, 1)=0 and passes a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0301] When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is the MIMO method #1, the transmitting device sets (K, 0)=0 and (K, 1)=1, and transmits (K, 0) and (K, 1).

[0302] When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is the MIMO method #2, the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1, and transmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0303] It should be noted that MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are different methods and are any of the MIMO methods described above. In addition, here, MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are used. However, the MIMO method that the transmitter may select may be one type, or may be two or more types.

[0304] FIG. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits a(1, 0), a(1, 1), a(2, 0), a( 2, 1), a(3, 0) and a(3, 1).

[0305] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 2 or 3, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 0, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, the control information associated with the method for modulating group j of data symbols is b(j, 0) and b(j, 1).

[0306] In this case, the determination described below is performed. In case the transmission method is a single stream transmission (SISO-(SIMO-)transmission), for example, in case a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 are specified in symbol #(j=K) data:

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method as QPSK.

[0307] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM.

[0308] When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 64QAM.

[0309] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 256QAM.

[0310] In case the transmission method is space-time block codes (or space-frequency block codes) (MISO transmission) or is MIMO method #1 or MIMO method #2, for example, in case a( K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0, a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 or a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)= 1 are given in symbol #(j=K) of data:

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to QPSK on stream 1 and 16QAM on stream 2.

[0311] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 16QAM in stream 2.

[0312] When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM on stream 1 and 64QAM on stream 2.

[0313] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 64QAM on stream 1 and 64QAM on stream 2.

[0314] It should be noted that the modulation method is not limited to the modulation methods described above. For example, the modulation method may include a modulation method such as APSK, non-uniform QAM, and non-uniform mapping. The modulation method is described in detail below.

[0315] FIG. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits b(1, 0), b(1, 1), b(2, 0), b( 2, 1), b(3, 0) and b(3, 1).

[0316] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 2 or 3, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 0, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, the control information associated with the error correction code encoding method of the data symbol group #j is c(j, 0) and c(j, 1).

[0317] In this case, when the data symbol group #(j=K) error correction coding method is error correction code A and the code length is α, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K , 1)=0 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0318] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code A and the code length is β, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)= 0 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0319] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code B and the code length is α, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)= 1 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0320] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code B and the code length is β, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)= 1 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0321] It should be noted that setting the error correction code is not limited to two jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set one or more types of error correction codes. Setting the code length is not limited to two jobs, and the transmitter should only be able to set two or more code lengths.

[0322] In FIG. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits c(1, 0), c(1, 1), c(2, 0), c( 2, 1), c(3, 0) and c(3, 1).

[0323] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 2 or 3, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 0, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, control information related to the coding rate of the data symbol group #j error correction code is d(j, 0) and d(j, 1).

[0324] In this case, when the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 1/2, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=0, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0325] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 2/3, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=0, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0326] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 3/4, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=1, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0327] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 4/5, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=1, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0328] It should be noted that setting the error correction code rate is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set one or more types of error correction code rates.

[0329] FIG. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits d(1, 0), d(1, 1), d(2, 0), d( 2, 1), d(3, 0) and d(3, 1).

[0330] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 2 or 3, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 0, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, information related to the number of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #j is e(j, 0) and e(j, 1).

[0331] In this case, when the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 256 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K , 0) and e(K, 1).

[0332] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 512 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0333] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 1024 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0334] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 2048 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0335] It should be noted that setting the number of characters is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set one or more types of number of characters.

[0336] FIG. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits e(1, 0), e(1, 1), e(2, 0), e( 2, 1), e(3, 0) and e(3, 1).

[0337] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ). In this case, the control information associated with the method for transmitting the data symbol group #j is a(j, 0) and a(j, 1).

[0338] In this case, when the method for transmitting the data symbol group #(j=K) is single stream transmission (SISO-(SIMO-)transmission), the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 and passes a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0339] When the method for transmitting the data symbol group #(j=K) is space-time block codes (or space-frequency block codes) (MISO transmission), the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=1 and a (K, 1)=0 and passes a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0340] When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is the MIMO method #1, the transmitting device sets (K, 0)=0 and (K, 1)=1, and transmits (K, 0) and (K, 1).

[0341] When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is the MIMO method #2, the transmitting device sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1, and transmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

[0342] It should be noted that MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are different methods and are any of the MIMO methods described above. In addition, here, MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are used. However, the MIMO method that the transmitter may select may be one type, or may be two or more types.

[0343] FIG. 4, 5, and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits a(1, 0), a(1, 1), a(2, 0), a(2, 1), a(3, 0) and a(3, 1).

[0344] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ). In this case, the control information associated with the method for modulating group j of data symbols is b(j, 0) and b(j, 1).

[0345] In this case, the determination described below is performed. In case the transmission method is a single stream transmission (SISO-(SIMO-)transmission), for example, in case a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 are specified in symbol #(j=K) data:

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method as QPSK.

[0346] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM.

[0347] When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 64QAM.

[0348] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 256QAM.

[0349] In case the transmission method is space-time block codes (or space-frequency block codes) (MISO transmission) or is MIMO method #1 or MIMO method #2, for example, if a( K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0, a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 or a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)= 1 are given in symbol #(j=K) of data:

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to QPSK on stream 1 and 16QAM on stream 2.

[0350] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 16QAM in stream 2.

[0351] When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 16QAM on stream 1 and 64QAM on stream 2.

[0352] When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 are satisfied, the transmitter sets the data symbol modulation method to 64QAM on stream 1 and 64QAM on stream 2.

[0353] It should be noted that the modulation method is not limited to the modulation methods described above. For example, the modulation method may include a modulation method such as APSK, non-uniform QAM, and non-uniform mapping. The modulation method is described in detail below.

[0354] FIG. 4, 5, and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits b(1, 0), b(1, 1), b(2, 0), b(2, 1), b(3, 0) and b(3, 1).

[0355] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ). In this case, the control information associated with the error correction code encoding method of the data symbol group #j is c(j, 0) and c(j, 1).

[0356] In this case, when the data symbol group #(j=K) error correction coding method is error correction code A and the code length is α, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K , 1)=0 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0357] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code A and the code length is β, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)= 0 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0358] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code B and the code length is α, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)= 1 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0359] When the error correction coding method of the data symbol group #(j=K) is the error correction code B and the code length in β, the transmitting device sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)= 1 and sends c(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

[0360] It should be noted that setting the error correction code is not limited to two jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set one or more types of error correction codes. Setting the code length is not limited to two jobs, and the transmitter should only be able to set two or more code lengths.

[0361] FIG. 4, 5, and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits c(1, 0), c(1, 1), c(2, 0), c(2, 1), c(3, 0) and c(3, 1).

[0362] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ). In this case, control information related to the coding rate of the data symbol group #j error correction code is d(j, 0) and d(j, 1).

[0363] In this case, when the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 1/2, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=0, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0364] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 2/3, the transmitting device sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=0, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0365] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 3/4, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=1, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0366] When the data symbol group error correction code #(j=K) coding rate is 4/5, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=1, and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

[0367] It should be noted that setting the error correction code rate is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set two or more types of error correction code rates.

[0368] FIG. 4, 5, and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmits d(1, 0), d(1, 1), d(2, 0), d(2, 1), d(3, 0) and d(3, 1).

[0369] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ).

[0370] In this case, when there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in a certain time interval, such as data symbol group #1 and frame data symbol group #2 in FIG. 4, 5 and 6, this time interval can be set. (A unit of time in a time slot in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups may be referred to as an OFDM symbol). The information associated with this time interval is f(0) and f(1).

[0371] In this case, when this time interval is 128 OFDM symbols, the transmitting device sets f(0)=0 and f(1)=0, and transmits f(0) and f(1).

[0372] When this time interval is 256 OFDM symbols, the transmitter sets f(0)=1 and f(1)=0, and transmits f(0) and f(1).

[0373] When this time interval is 512 OFDM symbols, the transmitter sets f(0)=1 and f(1)=0, and transmits f(0) and f(1).

[0374] When this time interval is 1024 OFDM symbols, the transmitter sets f(0)=1 and f(1)=0, and transmits f(0) and f(1).

[0375] It should be noted that the time slot setting is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set two or more types of time slots.

[0376] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ).

[0377] In this case, when there is no other data symbol group in a certain time interval, for example, data symbol group #3 in FIG. 4, 5, or 6, information related to the number of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #j is e(j, 0) and e(j, 1). However, for example, when there is data symbol group #4 immediately after data symbol group #3, mixing of data symbols from data symbol group #3 and data symbols from data symbol group #4 in a certain time interval may be provided in which data symbol group #3 and data symbol group #4 are contiguous.

[0378] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 256 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0379] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 512 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0380] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 1024 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0381] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 2048 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0382] It should be noted that setting the number of characters is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set two or more types of number of characters.

[0383] FIG. 4, 5, and 6, since data symbol group #3 corresponds to the above, the transmitter transmits e(3, 0) and e(3, 1).

[0384] A case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (0, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ).

[0385] In this case, when there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in a certain time interval, such as data symbol group #1 and frame data symbol group #2 in FIG. 4, 5, and 6, the number of carriers to be used by each group of data symbols may be specified.

[0386] In this case, the information related to the number of carriers is g(0) and g(1). For example, the total number of carriers is 512 carriers.

[0387] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 480 carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 32 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=0 and g(1)=0, and transmits g(0 ) and g(1).

[0388] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 448 carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 64 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=1 and g(1)=0, and transmits g(0 ) and g(1).

[0389] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 384 carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 128 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=0 and g(1)=1, and transmits g(0 ) and g(1).

[0390] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 256 carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 256 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=1 and g(1)=1, and transmits g(0 ) and g(1).

[0391] It should be noted that setting the number of carriers is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitter should be able to set only two or more types of the number of carriers.

[0392] The following describes a case in which there is a mixture of two groups of data symbols, with reference to FIG. 4-6 as an example of a case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in a certain time interval. However, mixing of three or more groups of data symbols may be provided. This aspect is described below with reference to FIG. 24, 25 and 26.

[0393] FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in the case where there are three groups of data symbols in a certain time interval, in contrast to FIG. 4. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 4 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 24, and they are not described.

[0394] FIG. 24 illustrates data symbol group #1 2401, data symbol group #2 2402, and data symbol group #4 2403, and there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #4 in a certain time interval.

[0395] FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in the case where there are three groups of data symbols in a certain time interval, in contrast to FIG. 5. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 5 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 25, and they are not described.

[0396] FIG. 25 illustrates data symbol group #1 2501, data symbol group #2 2502, and data symbol group #5 2503, and there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #4 in a specific time interval.

[0397] FIG. 26 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in the case where there are three groups of data symbols in a certain time interval, in contrast to FIG. 6. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 6 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 26 and they are not described.

[0398] FIG. 26 illustrates data symbol group #1 2601, data symbol group #2 2602, and data symbol group #4 2603, and there are data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #4 in a certain time interval.

[0399] The transmitter in FIG. 1 may be able to select the frame configurations of FIG. 24-26. In addition, a frame configuration that has four or more groups of data symbols in a certain time interval may be used, in contrast to FIG. 4-6 and 24-26,.

[0400] FIG. 24, 25, and 26 illustrate examples in which a time-divisioned data symbol group is arranged after a frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement. The frequency division-divisioned data symbol group may be arranged after the time-divisioned data symbol group. In this case, in the example of FIG. 25, a first preamble and a second preamble are inserted between the time division multiplexed data symbol group and the frequency division multiplexed data symbol group. However, characters other than the first preamble and the second preamble may be inserted. Then, in the example of FIG. 26, a pilot symbol is inserted between the time-divisioned data symbol group and the frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, characters other than the pilot character may be inserted.

[0401] It should be noted that in case the transmitter (FIG. 1) transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 24, when the transmitter includes the "frame configuration related information" to transmit the frame configuration related information to the receiving device (terminal) in the first preamble or the second preamble, and transmits the "frame configuration related information", for example, when three bits v0, v1 and v2 are allocated as "frame configuration related information", the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 0, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0402] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 25, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 1, 0) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0403] When the transmitter transmits the modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 26, the transmitting device sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 1, 1) and transmits "frame configuration related information".

[0404] It should be noted that in FIG. 24, 25, and 26, the data symbol group may also be a symbol group based on the MIMO-(transmission) method and the MISO-(transmission) method (as expected, the data symbol group may be a SISO-(SIMO-) symbol group. method). In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple streams (s1 and s2, described below) are transmitted. In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple modulated signals are transmitted from multiple (different) antennas.

[0405] Next, a case is assumed in which the transmitter (FIG. 1) selects the frame configuration in FIG. 24, 25 or 26, i.e. it is assumed that the transmitter (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) equal to (1, 0, 1), (1, 1, 0) or (1, 1, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2 ).

[0406] In this case, when there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in a certain time interval, such as data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and frame data symbol group #4 in FIG. 24, 25, and 26, the number of carriers to be used by each group of data symbols may be specified.

[0407] In this case, the information related to the number of carriers is g(0) and g(1). For example, the total number of carriers is 512 carriers.

[0408] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 448 carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 32 carriers, and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is 32 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=0 and g( 1)=0 and passes g(0) and g(1).

[0409] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 384 carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 64 carriers, and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is 64 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=1 and g( 1)=0 and passes g(0) and g(1).

[0410] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 256 carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 128 carriers, and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is 128 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=0 and g( 1)=1 and passes g(0) and g(1).

[0411] When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is 480 carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is 16 carriers, and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is 16 carriers of the two data symbol groups, the transmitting device sets g(0)=1 and g( 1)=1 and passes g(0) and g(1).

[0412] It should be noted that setting the number of carriers is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set one or more types of the number of carriers.

[0413] In addition, the effect of improving data transmission efficiency can be obtained when, in frames in which there is an intermingling of "a case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval" and "a case in which there is only one group of symbols data in the second time slot" as shown in FIG. 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, and 26, the transmitting apparatus may separately set the carrier interval (FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) size or Fourier transform size) in the "case where there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval", and a carrier interval (FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) size or Fourier transform size) in "the case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval". This is because the carrier interval corresponding in terms of transmission efficiency in the "case in which there is confusion of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time slot" and the carrier interval corresponding in terms of transmission efficiency in the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time slot" are different.

[0414] Therefore, the control information associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval" is ha(0) and ha(1).

[0415] In this case, when the carrier interval is 0.25 kHz, the transmitting device sets ha(0)=0 and ha(1)=0, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

[0416] When the carrier interval is 0.5 kHz, the transmitting device sets ha(0)=1 and ha(1)=0, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

[0417] When the carrier interval is 1 kHz, the transmitting device sets ha(0)=0 and ha(1)=1, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

[0418] When the carrier interval is 2 kHz, the transmitting device sets ha(0)=1 and ha(1)=1, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

[0419] It should be noted that setting the carrier interval is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set two or more types of carrier intervals.

[0420] Then, the control information associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval" is hb(0) and hb(1).

[0421] In this case, when the carrier interval is 0.25 kHz, the transmitting device sets hb(0)=0 and hb(1)=0, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

[0422] When the carrier interval is 0.5 kHz, the transmitting device sets hb(0)=1 and hb(1)=0, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

[0423] When the carrier interval is 1 kHz, the transmitting device sets hb(0)=0 and hb(1)=1, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

[0424] When the carrier interval is 2 kHz, the transmitting device sets hb(0)=1 and hb(1)=1, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

[0425] It should be noted that setting the carrier interval is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should only be able to set two or more types of carrier intervals.

[0426] Here, the predetermined values of the carrier interval selected in any of "the case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval" and "the case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval" are set identical, so that the carrier interval preset values in "the case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time slot" are 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, and 2 kHz, and the carrier interval preset values are " in the case where there is only one group of data symbols in the second time slot" are 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, and 2 kHz. However, the set of predetermined values selected in the "case in which there is a mixture of multiple data symbol groups in the first time interval" and the set of predetermined values selected in the "case in which there is only one data symbol group in the second time interval" may differ. For example, the carrier interval setpoints in "the case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time slot" may be 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, and 2 kHz, and the carrier interval set values of " in the case where there is only one group of data symbols in the second time slot," may be 0.125 kHz, 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz, and 1 kHz. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to this example.

[0427] It should be noted that a method for transmitting control information ha(0) and ha(1) associated with a carrier interval associated with "the case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval" and control information hb(0) and hb(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval" with any of the first preamble and the second preamble in FIG. 4, 5, 6, 24, 25 and 26.

[0428] For example, in FIG. 4, 6, 24, and 26, a method for transmitting control information ha(0) and ha(1) associated with a carrier interval associated with "the case in which there is confusion of multiple data symbol groups in the first time interval" can be considered, and control information hb(0) and hb(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval" with the first preamble 201 or the second preamble 202.

[0429] FIG. 5 and 25, a method for transmitting the control information ha(0) and ha(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is confusion of multiple data symbol groups in the first time interval" with the first preamble 201, or second preamble 202, and transmitting control information hb(0) and hb(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval" with the first preamble 501 or the second preamble 502 .

[0430] In addition, as another method, in FIG. 5 and 25, a method can be used for transmitting a plurality of times the control information ha(0) and ha(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is an intermingling of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval" and the control information hb(0) and hb(1) associated with the carrier interval associated with the "case in which there is only one group of data symbols in the second time interval", so that ha(0) and ha(1) and hb(0) and hb(1) are transmitted with "first preamble 201 or second preamble 202" and with "first preamble 501 or second preamble 502". In this case, for example, a receiving device that only needs to receive data of data symbol group #1 and a receiver that needs to receive only data of data symbol group # can recognize situations of all frames. Therefore, both receivers can be easily and stably controlled.

[0431] As expected, a receiver (eg, FIG. 23) that receives the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 receives the above-described control information, demodulates and decodes a data symbol group based on the control information, and obtains the information.

[0432] As described above, the information described in the present exemplary embodiment is transmitted as control information, and thus, the effect of improving data reception quality and improving data transmission efficiency and ensuring accurate operation of the receiver can be obtained.

[0433] It should be noted that the frame configuration of the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is described in the first exemplary embodiment and the second exemplary embodiment with reference to FIG. 3, 4, 5, and 6, but the arrangement of data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 on the frequency axis in FIG. 4, 5, and 6 is not limited to this arrangement, and for example, data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 may be arranged as data symbol group #1 (2701) and data symbol group #2 (2702) in FIG. 27, 28 and 29. It should be noted that in each of FIGS. 27, 28 and 29, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency.

[0434] Then, a method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) in the frame configuration in FIG. 5 and a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402) may be defined with a first preamble 201 and/or a second preamble 202. A method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 may be defined with a first preamble 501 and/or a second preamble 502.

[0435] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402) are MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" can be selected. , or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402) are SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case may be selected in which the "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or the case in which "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is SISO transmission (SIMO- transmission)".

[0436] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and second preamble" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and in a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and second preamble", there is no mixing of the MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and there is no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

[0437] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0438] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0439] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. It should be noted that when there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0440] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. It should be noted that the pilot symbol 4102 is highly likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0441] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0442] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0443] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0444] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0445] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0446] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0447] Similarly, in the frame configuration of FIG. 25, the method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), and the method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503) may be set with the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202, and a method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 may be defined with first preamble 501 and/or second preamble 502.

[0448] In this case, either the case in which "a method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), and a method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503) may be selected is a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission" or the case in which "a method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), and a method for transmitting group #4 (2503) data symbols represent a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which the "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is a MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "a method for transmitting a group (403) #3 of data symbols is a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0449] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and in a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and second preamble", there is no mixing of the MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and there is no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

[0450] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0451] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0452] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. It should be noted that when there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0453] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into the data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way the pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is most likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0454] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0455] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0456] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0457] Then, "the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0458] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0459] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0460] In addition, in the frame configuration of FIG. 6, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2), the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402), and the method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 may be set with the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble. 202.

[0461] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402) is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" can be selected. , or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402) are SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case may be selected in which the "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or the case in which "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is SISO transmission (SIMO- transmission)".

[0462] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "first preamble set and second preamble" and the "pilot symbol" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO - transmission)". Thus, there is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "pilot symbol" and the next "first preamble and second preamble set" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)" . Thus, there is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). However, FIG. 6 does not illustrate the "set of first preamble and second preamble" next to the pilot symbol.

[0463] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0464] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0465] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0466] "A pilot symbol to be inserted into a data symbol group during a SISO transmission" and a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a data symbol group during a MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way the pilot symbols are configured. . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is most likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0467] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0468] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0469] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0470] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0471] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0472] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0473] Similarly, the method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501) in the frame configuration of FIG. 26, a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), a method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503), and a method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 may be set with the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202.

[0474] In this case, either the case in which "a method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), and a method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503) may be selected is a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission" or the case in which "a method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), a method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (2502), and a method for transmitting group #4 (2503) data symbols represent a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which the "method for transmitting data symbol group (403) #3 is a MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "a method for transmitting a group (403) #3 of data symbols is a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0475] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "first preamble set and second preamble" and the "pilot symbol" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO - transmission)". Thus, there is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "pilot symbol" and the next "first preamble and second preamble set" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)" . There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). However, FIG. 6 does not illustrate the "set of first preamble and second preamble" next to the pilot symbol.

[0476] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0477] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0478] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0479] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is most likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0480] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0481] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0482] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0483] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0484] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0485] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0486] Third exemplary embodiment

The first exemplary embodiment and the second exemplary embodiment describe a MIMO transmission method using precoding and phase change for transmitting multiple streams by using multiple antennas, and a MISO (multi-input, single output) transmission method using space-time block codes or space-time -frequency block codes for transmitting multiple streams by using multiple antennas. The following describes an example of a method for transmitting preambles in case the transmitter is considered to transmit modulated signals via these transmission methods. It should be noted that the MIMO transmission method may be a MIMO transmission method that does not perform a phase change.

[0487] The transmitter in FIG. 1 includes antenna 126_1 and antenna 126_2. In this case, as an antenna configuration method that is likely to easily demultiplex two modulated signals to be transmitted, a method is provided in which:

"antenna 126_1 is a horizontally polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a vertically polarized antenna",

or:

"antenna 126_1 is a vertically polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a horizontally polarized antenna",

or:

"antenna 126_1 is a circular polarized clockwise rotating antenna, and antenna 126_2 is a circular polarized counterclockwise rotating antenna",

or:

"antenna 126_1 is a circularly polarized counter-clockwise rotating antenna, and antenna 126_2 is a circular polarized clockwise rotating antenna."

Such an antenna configuration method is referred to as the first antenna configuration method.

[0488] In addition, an antenna configuration method other than the first antenna configuration method is referred to as the second antenna configuration method. Therefore, examples of the second method for configuring antennas include methods in which:

"antenna 126_1 is a horizontally polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a horizontally polarized antenna",

And

"antenna 126_1 is a vertically polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a vertically polarized antenna",

"antenna 126_1 is a circular polarized counterclockwise rotating antenna and antenna 126_2 is a circular polarized counterclockwise rotating antenna",

And

"antenna 126_1 is a circular polarization clockwise rotation antenna, and antenna 126_2 is a circular polarization clockwise rotation antenna."

[0489] Each transmitter (FIG. 1) can be defined in the first antenna configuration method, in which, for example, "antenna 126_1 is a horizontally polarized antenna, and antenna 126_2 is a vertically polarized antenna", or "antenna 126_1 is is a vertically polarized antenna, and antenna 126_2 is a horizontally polarized antenna",

or:

- the second antenna configuration method, in which, for example, "antenna 126_1 is a horizontally polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a horizontally polarized antenna", or "antenna 126_1 is a vertically polarized antenna and antenna 126_2 is a vertical polarization. For example, in a broadcast system, any of the antenna configuration method of the first antenna configuration method and the second antenna configuration method are adapted depending on the location in order to install the transmitter (installation areas).

[0490] In such an antenna configuration method, the following describes a method for configuring the first preamble and the second preamble in the case of frame configuration methods, for example, in FIG. 2-6 and 24-26.

[0491] Similar to the second exemplary embodiment, the transmitting apparatus transmits control information related to the method for configuring antennas by using the first preamble. In this case, the information related to the antenna configuration method is m(0) and m(1).

[0492] In this case, when in the two transmission antennas of the transmission device, the first transmission antenna is a horizontally polarized antenna and therefore transmits the first horizontally polarized modulated signal, and the second transmission antenna is a horizontally polarized antenna and therefore transmits a second horizontally polarized modulated signal, the transmitter sets m(0)=0 and m(1)=0, and transmits m(0) and m(1).

[0493] When in two transmitting antennas of the transmitting apparatus, the first transmitting antenna is a vertically polarized antenna and thereby transmits the first vertically polarized modulated signal, and the second transmitting antenna is a vertically polarized antenna and therefore transmits the second modulated signal with vertical polarization, the transmitter sets m(0)=1 and m(1)=0 and transmits m(0) and m(1).

[0494] When in two transmitting antennas of the transmitting device, the first transmitting antenna is a horizontally polarized antenna and thereby transmits the first horizontally polarized modulated signal, and the second transmitting antenna is a vertically polarized antenna and therefore transmits the second modulated signal with vertical polarization, the transmitter sets m(0)=0 and m(1)=1 and transmits m(0) and m(1).

[0495] When in two transmitting antennas of the transmitting apparatus, the first transmitting antenna is a vertically polarized antenna and thereby transmits the first vertically polarized modulated signal, and the second transmitting antenna is a horizontally polarized antenna and therefore transmits the second modulated signal with horizontal polarization, the transmitter sets m(0)=1 and m(1)=1 and transmits m(0) and m(1).

[0496] The transmitter then transmits m(0) and m(1), for example, with the first preamble in the frame configuration method of FIG. 2-6 and 24-26. Therefore, the receiver receives the first preamble and demodulates and decodes the first preamble, and because of this, the receiver can easily recognize which polarized wave is used to transmit the modulated signal (for example, the second preamble and a group of data symbols) transmitted by the transmitter. devices. Therefore, it is possible to accurately specify the antenna (including the use of a polarized wave) to be used by the receiver during reception. As a result, the effect of allowing high reception gain (high reception field intensity) to be obtained can be obtained. It is also given the advantage that it becomes unnecessary to perform signal processing for reception, which has little effect of obtaining gain. Therefore, it is possible to obtain such an advantage that the quality of data reception is improved.

[0497] The aspect described above is that "it is also advantageous that it becomes unnecessary to perform signal processing for reception which has a small gain gain effect." The following is a further description of this aspect.

[0498] A case is explained below in which the transmitter transmits modulated signals with only horizontally polarized waves, and the receiver includes a horizontally polarized reception antenna and a vertically polarized reception antenna. In this case, the modulated signals transmitted by the transmitter may be received at a horizontally polarized receiver antenna. However, a vertically polarized receiver antenna has a very low field strength for receiving modulated signals transmitted by the transmitter.

[0499] Therefore, in such a case, when the power consumed by signal processing is considered, it is not so necessary to carry out the operation of performing signal processing on the received signals received at the vertical polarization receiving antenna of the receiving apparatus and obtaining data.

[0500] In view of the foregoing, it is necessary for the transmitter to transmit "control information related to the antenna configuration method", and for the receiver to perform fine control.

[0501] The following describes a case in which the transmitter includes two or more horizontal polarization antennas, however, this does not necessarily mean that the transmitter does not include a vertical polarization antenna, or a case in which the transmitter includes two or more vertically polarized antennas, however, this does not necessarily mean that the transmitter does not include a horizontally polarized antenna.

[0502] The case in which the transmitter includes two or more horizontally polarized antennas

In this case, when the transmitter transmits one stream using the SISO transmission method or the SIMO transmission method, the transmitter transmits modulated signals from one or more horizontally polarized antennas. Considering this case, when a transmitter transmits a first preamble including control information associated with the antenna configuration method described above from one or more horizontally polarized antennas, a receiver may receive a first preamble including control information associated with a high-gain antenna configuration method, and thereby can obtain high quality data reception.

[0503] Then, the receiver obtains control information related to the antenna configuration method, and thus the receiver can recognize the antenna configuration by which the transmitter transmits the MIMO transmission method and the MISO transmission method.

[0504] The case in which the transmitter includes two or more vertically polarized antennas

In this case, when the transmitter transmits one stream using the SISO transmission method or the SIMO transmission method, the transmitter transmits modulated signals from one or more vertically polarized antennas. Considering this case, when a transmitter transmits a first preamble including control information associated with the antenna configuration method described above from one or more vertically polarized antennas, a receiver may receive a first preamble including control information associated with a high-gain antenna configuration method, and thereby can obtain high quality data reception.

[0505] Then, the receiver obtains control information related to the antenna configuration method, and thereby the receiver can recognize the antenna configuration by which the transmitter transmits the MIMO transmission method and the MISO transmission method.

[0506] The following describes a case in which the transmitter includes a horizontally polarized antenna and a vertically polarized antenna.

[0507] In this case, when the transmission device transmits one stream using the SISO transmission method or the SIMO transmission method, the transmission device can be considered to:

- the first way:

- transmits modulated signals from a horizontally polarized antenna and a vertically polarized antenna,

- the second way:

- transmits modulated signals from a horizontally polarized antenna,

- the third way:

- transmits modulated signals from a vertically polarized antenna.

[0508] In this case, the transmission from the antenna used for transmitting the first preamble including the control information associated with the antenna configuration method described above is performed by a method identical to the method in the case of transmission from the antenna used for transmitting one stream with using the SISO transmission method or the SIMO transmission method.

[0509] Therefore, when the modulated signals are transmitted by the first method in single stream transmission using the SISO transmission method or the SIMO transmission method, the first preamble including control information related to the antenna configuration method is transmitted from the horizontally polarized antenna and antennas with vertical polarization.

[0510] When the modulated signals are transmitted by the second method, the first preamble including control information related to the antenna configuration method is transmitted from the horizontally polarized antenna.

[0511] When the modulated signals are transmitted by the third method, the first preamble including control information related to the antenna configuration method is transmitted from the vertically polarized antenna.

[0512] Thus, there is such an advantage that the receiver can receive the first preamble in a similar manner to receiving data receive symbol groups transmitted by the SISO method, i. e. it becomes unnecessary to change the signal processing method according to the transmission method. It should be noted that the above-described advantage can also be obtained.

[0513] Then, the receiver obtains control information associated with the antenna configuration method, and thus the receiver can recognize the antenna configuration by which the transmitter transmits the MIMO transmission method and the MISO transmission method.

[0514] As described above, the first preamble including control information related to the antenna configuration method is transmitted, and therefore, the receiver can receive the first preamble with high gain. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of improving the reception quality of a group of data symbols, and it is possible to obtain the effect of providing an improvement in the power efficiency of the receiver.

[0515] It should be noted that the above describes the case where the control information associated with the antenna configuration method is contained in the first preamble as an example, but even when the control information associated with the antenna configuration method is not contained in the first preamble, it is possible to obtain identical effect.

[0516] Then, the antenna used to transmit the first preamble should most likely be determined during the installation or maintenance of the transmitter, and a change in the antenna to be used during operation may also be made, but such a change is less likely to be made frequently in the course of practical work.

[0517] Fourth exemplary embodiment

An example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is described in the exemplary embodiments described above. The following describes in detail the configuration of a frame in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 in the present exemplary embodiment.

[0518] FIG. 30 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 30 and they are not described. In FIG. 30, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0519] FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #1 3001, data symbol group #2 3002, and data symbol group #3 3003. There are data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), and data symbol group #3 (3003) from time t1 to time t2, and at each time there are a plurality of data symbol groups.

[0520] Similarly, FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #4 3004, data symbol group #5 3005, and data symbol group #6 3006. There are data symbol group #4 (3004), data symbol group #5 (3005), and data symbol group #6 (3006) from time t2 and time t3, and at each time there are a plurality of data symbol groups.

[0521] In such a case, FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #7 3007, data symbol group #8 3008, and data symbol group #9 3009. There are data symbol group #7 (3007), data symbol group #8 (3008), and data symbol group #9 (3009) from time t3 to time t4, and at each time there are a plurality of data symbol groups.

[0522] In this case, the number of carriers to be used in each group of data symbols may be specified. The number of character groups existing at each time is not limited to three. Only two or more character groups should be provided.

[0523] It should be noted that the data symbol group can also be a symbol group based on the MIMO-(transmission) method and the MISO-(transmission) method. As expected, the data character group may be a SISO-(SIMO-) method character group. In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple streams (s1 and s2, described below) are transmitted. In this case, at the same time and on the same (common) frequency, multiple modulated signals are transmitted from multiple (different) antennas. Then, this aspect is not limited to FIG. 30, and the same also applies to FIG. 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37 and 38.

[0524] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 30 are such that frequency division is performed and that there are two or more time slots in which there are multiple groups of data symbols. Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist at the same time and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting the data sections.

[0525] FIG. 31 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 and 30 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 31 and they are not described. In FIG. 31, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0526] FIG. 31 illustrates data symbol group #10 3101 and data symbol group #11 3102, and there are data symbol group #10 (3101) and data symbol group #11 (3102) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, time division is performed and there are a plurality of groups of data symbols.

[0527] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 31 are such that frequency division is performed and there are two or more time slots in which there are a plurality of groups of data symbols, and that time division is performed and there are a plurality of data symbols. Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting the data sections, as well as allowing flexible setting of the data rate by performing time division and setting the data sections appropriately.

[0528] FIG. 32 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2, 30 and 5 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 32, and they are not described. In FIG. 32, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0529] FIG. 32 illustrates data symbol group #7 3201 and data symbol group #8 3202, and there are data symbol group #7 (3201) and data symbol group #8 (3202) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, time division is performed and there are a plurality of groups of data symbols.

[0530] Difference from FIG. 31 is that the first preamble 501 and the second preamble 502 are arranged before data symbol group #7 (3201). In this case, the control information associated with frequency division multiplexed data symbol groups #1 to #6, examples of which include the number of carriers and the time interval required for each data symbol group, a method for modulating each data symbol group, the method for transmitting each group of data symbols and the method of the error correction code to be used in each group of data symbols is transmitted with the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202 in FIG. 32. It should be noted that an example of the control information is described in the second exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that this aspect is described further.

[0531] Then, control information associated with time-divisioned data symbol groups #7 and #8, examples of which include the number of symbols (or time interval) that are needed for each data symbol group, a method for modulating each symbol group data, a method for transmitting each data symbol group, and an error correction code method to be used in each data symbol group are transmitted with the first preamble 501 and/or the second preamble 502 in FIG. 32. It should be noted that an example of the control information is described in the second exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that this aspect is described further.

[0532] When control information is transmitted in this manner, it becomes unnecessary to include the allocated control information for the time division-divisioned data symbol groups in the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202, and it also becomes unnecessary to include the allocated control information for the frequency-frequency-divisioned data symbol groups. channel division into the first preamble 501 and the second preamble 502, and control information data transmission efficiency and control simplification for the receiver control information can be realized.

[0533] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 32 are such that frequency division is performed and there are two or more time slices in which there are a plurality of groups of data symbols, and that time division is performed and there are a plurality of data symbols. Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting the data sections, as well as allowing flexible setting of the data rate by performing time division and setting the data sections appropriately.

[0534] FIG. 33 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2, 30, 32 and 6 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 33, and they are not described. In FIG. 33, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0535] FIG. 33 illustrates data symbol group #7 3201 and data symbol group #8 3202, and there are data symbol group #7 (3201) and data symbol group #8 (3202) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, time division is performed and there are a plurality of groups of data symbols.

[0536] The difference between FIG. 30 and 31 is that the pilot symbol 601 is arranged before data symbol group #7 (3201). In this case, the advantage in the case of arranging the pilot symbol 601 is as described in the first exemplary embodiment.

[0537] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 33 are such that frequency division is performed and there are two or more time slices in which there are a plurality of groups of data symbols, and that time division is performed and there are a plurality of data symbols. Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting the data sections, as well as allowing flexible setting of the data rate by performing time division and setting the data sections appropriately.

[0538] FIG. 34 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 34, and they are not described. In FIG. 34, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0539] FIG. 34 illustrates data character group #1 3401, data character group #2 3402, data character group #3 3403, data character group #4 3404, data character group #5 3405, data character group #6 3406, data character group #7 3407 and group #8 3408 data characters.

[0540] FIG. 34, a group of data symbols is arranged in a frame by using a frequency division method. In such a case, the difference between FIG. 34 from FIG. 30-33 is that there is flexibility in setting the time interval between the respective groups of data symbols.

[0541] For example, data symbol group #1 has symbols arranged from time t1 to time t2 and has a long time interval compared to other data symbols. Data symbol groups other than data symbol group #1 also have a flexible time interval.

[0542] Distinctive aspects in FIG. 34 are such that frequency division is performed and that data symbol group timeslots are flexibly set. Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist at the same time and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting the data sections.

[0543] FIG. 35 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2 and 34 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 35, and they are not described. In FIG. 35, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0544] FIG. 35 illustrates data symbol group #9 3509, data symbol group #10 3510, data symbol group #11 3511, and data symbol group #12 3512. Frequency division is performed, and data symbol group #9, data symbol group #10, data symbol group #11, data symbol group #12, and data symbol group #13 are transmitted between time t2 and time t3. Compared with the time t1 and the time t2, the distinctive aspects are that the time slot of data symbol group #9, the time slot of data symbol group #10, and the time slot of data symbol group #11 are equal, and the time slot of data symbol group #12, and time interval group #13 data symbols are equal.

[0545] FIG. 35 illustrates data symbol group #14 3514 and data symbol group #15 3515. Time division is performed, and data symbol group #14 and data symbol group #15 are transmitted between time t3 and time t4.

[0546] Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting data sections and frequency sections.

[0547] FIG. 36 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 36 and they are not described. In FIG. 36, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0548] The difference of FIG. 36 from FIG. 35 is that the first preamble 501, the second preamble 502, the first preamble 3601, and the second preamble 3602 are arranged. In this case, data symbol groups #1-#8 and data symbol groups #9-#13 are subjected to frequency division, and also, data symbol groups #14 and #15 are time-separated for linking.

[0549] Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting data sections and frequency sections.

[0550] In this case, the control information associated with the data symbol groups #1-#8 subjected to frequency division, examples of which include the number of carriers and the time interval that are needed for each data symbol group, a method for modulating each group data symbols, a method for transmitting each data symbol group, and an error correction code method to be used in each data symbol group are transmitted with the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202 in FIG. 36. It should be noted that an example of the control information is described in the second exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that this aspect is described further.

[0551] Then, control information associated with the frequency division multiplexed data symbol groups #9 to #13, examples of which include the number of carriers and the time interval that are needed for each data symbol group, a method for modulating each data symbol group, the method for transmitting each group of data symbols and the method of the error correction code to be used in each group of data symbols is transmitted with the first preamble 501 and/or the second preamble 502 in FIG. 36. It should be noted that an example of the control information is described in the second exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that this aspect is described further.

[0552] In addition, the control information associated with time division data symbol groups #14 and #15, examples of which include the number of symbols (or time interval) that are needed for each data symbol group, a method for modulating each data symbol groups, a method for transmitting each data symbol group, and an error correction code method to be used in each data symbol group are transmitted with the first preamble 3601 and/or the second preamble 3602 in FIG. 36. It should be noted that an example of the control information is described in the second exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that this aspect is described further.

[0553] When control information is transmitted in this manner, it becomes optional to include the allocated control information for time division-divisioned data symbol groups in the first preamble 201, the second preamble 202, the first preamble 501, and the second preamble 502, and it also becomes optional to include the allocated control information. information for frequency division data symbol groups to the first preamble 3601 and the second preamble 3602, and control information data transmission efficiency and control simplification for the receiver control information can be realized.

[0554] FIG. 37 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 37 and they are not described. In FIG. 37, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0555] The difference of FIG. 37 from FIG. 35 and 36 is that the pilot symbols 601 and 3701 are arranged. In this case, data symbol groups #1-#8 and data symbol groups #9-#13 are frequency-multiplexed, and also symbol groups #14 and #15 data is time-divisioned for compositing.

[0556] Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting data sections and frequency sections. In addition, the effect in the case of inserting a pilot symbol is as described in the first exemplary embodiment.

[0557] FIG. 38 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 38 and they are not described. In FIG. 38, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Further, since a transmission method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method is used, there are multiple carriers at a frequency along the vertical axis.

[0558] The difference of FIG. 38 from FIG. 35, 36, and 37 is that the "first preamble and second preamble" or "pilot symbols" 3801 and 3802 are arranged. In this case, data symbol groups #1-#8 and data symbol groups #9-#13 are subjected to frequency channelization, and also groups #14 and #15 of data symbols are subjected to temporary channelization for arrangement.

[0559] Therefore, there is an effect of allowing a group of symbols with different data reception quality to exist simultaneously and allowing flexible setting of the data rate by appropriately setting data sections and frequency sections.

[0560] Then, as illustrated in FIG. 38, the "first preamble and second preamble" or "pilot symbols" 3801 and 3802 are inserted, and depending on the situation, the "first preamble and second preamble" or "pilot symbols" are switched and used. The above-described switching may be performed based on the transmission method, for example.

[0561] FIG. 30-38 illustrate examples in which a time-divisioned data symbol group is arranged after a frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement. The frequency division-divisioned data symbol group may be arranged after the time-divisioned data symbol group. In this case, in the example of FIG. 32 and 36, a first preamble and a second preamble are inserted between the time-divisioned data symbol group and the frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, characters other than the first preamble and the second preamble may be inserted. Moreover, in the example of FIG. 33 and 37, a pilot symbol is inserted between the time-divisioned data symbol group and the frequency-divisioned data symbol group. However, characters other than the pilot character may be inserted.

[0562] In the present exemplary embodiment, configuration examples of a modulated signal frame to be transmitted by a transmitter are described below with reference to FIG. 30-38. With reference to these drawings, the aspect that "time division of channels (time division of channels) is performed" is described above. However, when two groups of data symbols are connected, there is a frequency division divided portion in the spliced portion. This aspect is described below with reference to FIG. 39.

[0563] FIG. 39 illustrates a symbol 3901 of data symbol group #1 and a symbol 3902 of data symbol group #2. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 39, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 4. In this case, the data symbol group #2 symbol is assembled from carrier 5 at time t0. Then only a portion at time t0 is exclusively subjected to frequency division. However, there is only a data symbol group #1 symbol before time t0, and there is only a data symbol group #2 symbol after time t0. At this point, time division of channels (time division of channels) is performed.

[0564] FIG. 40 illustrates another example. It should be noted that identical reference numbers are assigned to those in FIG. 39. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 40, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 4. Then, as illustrated at time t1, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 5. Then, the data symbol group #2 symbol is assembled from carrier 5 at time t0, and the group symbol #2 data symbols are assembled from carrier 6 at time t1. Then the portions at time t0 and time t1 are exclusively subjected to frequency division. However, there is only a symbol for data symbol group #1 before time t0, and there is only a symbol for data symbol #2 after time t1. At this point, time division of channels (time division of channels) is performed.

[0565] As illustrated in FIG. 39 and 40, a case is envisaged in which, except for exceptional portions, there is a time at which there is no data symbol other than a symbol from data symbol group #1, but a pilot symbol or the like can be provided, and a time at which there is no data symbol other than a symbol in data symbol group #2, but a pilot symbol or the like may be provided. This case is referred to as "time division is performed (time division)". Therefore, the existing exclusive time based method is not limited to FIG. 39 and 40.

[0566] In addition, "time division is performed (time division)" is not limited to the present exemplary embodiment, and the same interpretation also applies to other exemplary embodiments.

[0567] As described in the first exemplary embodiment, the transmission device in FIG. 1 may select any frame configuration from the frame configurations described in the first to third exemplary embodiment and the frame configuration described in the present exemplary embodiment, and may transmit a modulated signal. An example of a method for configuring control information from frame configuration related information is as described in the first exemplary embodiment.

[0568] Then, a receiver (eg, FIG. 23) that receives the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 receives the control information described in the first exemplary embodiment, the second exemplary embodiment, and the like, demodulates and decodes a group of data symbols based on the control information, and obtains information. As a result, the information described herein is transmitted as control information, and thus, the effect of improving the quality of data reception and improving the efficiency of data transmission and ensuring accurate operation of the receiver can be obtained.

[0569] A method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#6 in the frame configuration of FIG. 32 may be specified with a first preamble 201 and/or a second preamble 202. A method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 may be specified with a first preamble 501 and/or a second preamble 502.

[0570] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#6 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting groups #1- The #6 data symbols represent a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission" or the case wherein "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0571] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and in a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and second preamble", there is no mixing of the MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and there is no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

[0572] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0573] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0574] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0575] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. It should be noted that the pilot symbol 4102 is highly likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0576] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0577] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0578] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0579] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0580] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0581] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0582] Similarly, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#8 in the frame configuration of FIG. 36 may be defined with a first preamble 201 and/or a second preamble 202. A method for transmitting data symbol groups #9-#13 may be defined with a first preamble 501 and/or a second preamble 502. A method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 may be set with the first preamble 3601 and/or the second preamble 3602.

[0583] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#8 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting groups #1- The #8 data symbols are SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #9-#13 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is MIMO- transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0584] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and the second preamble" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and in a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "set of the first preamble and second preamble" and the next "set of the first preamble and second preamble", there is no mixing of the MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and there is no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

[0585] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0586] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0587] In addition, in association with the above-described transmission method switching, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted in a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0588] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. It should be noted that the pilot symbol 4102 is highly likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0589] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0590] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0591] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0592] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0593] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0594] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0595] In addition, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#8 in the frame configuration of FIG. 33 may be given with a first preamble 201 and/or a second preamble 202.

[0596] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#6 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting groups #1- The #6 data symbols represent a SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission" or the case wherein "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0597] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "first preamble set and second preamble" and the "pilot symbol" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO - transmission)". There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "pilot symbol" and the next "first preamble and second preamble set" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)" . There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). However, FIG. 33 does not illustrate the "set of first preamble and second preamble" next to the pilot symbol.

[0598] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0599] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0600] In addition, in association with the above-described switching of transmission methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0601] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is most likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0602] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0603] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0604] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0605] Then, "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0606] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0607] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0608] Similarly, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#15 in the frame configuration of FIG. 37 may be given with a first preamble 201 and/or a second preamble 202.

[0609] In this case, either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1-#8 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting groups #1- The #8 data symbols are SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13 is MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #9-#13 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)", and either the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is MIMO- transmission or MISO transmission" or the case in which "the method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)".

[0610] Thus, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "first preamble set and second preamble" and the "pilot symbol" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO - transmission)". There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "pilot symbol" and the next "first preamble and second preamble set" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)" . There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission). However, FIG. 37 does not illustrate the "set of first preamble and second preamble" next to the pilot symbol.

[0611] In addition, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groups present between the "pilot symbol" and the "pilot symbol" is either "MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" or "SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)" . There is no mixing of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission), and no mixing of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

[0612] When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-) transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-) transmission method, the jitter of the received field strength increases at the receiver. For this reason, there is a problem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD (analogue-to-digital) conversion, and therefore deterioration in data reception quality. However, the above-described method increases the likelihood that an effect of suppressing the occurrence of such a phenomenon and improving the quality of data reception can be obtained.

[0613] However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

[0614] In addition, in association with the above-described switching of transmission methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols are also switched, and there is also an advantage in terms of improving data transmission efficiency. This is because there is no mixing of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method. When there is a mixture of the SISO-(SIMO-)transmission method and the MIMO-(MISO-)transmission method, there is a possibility that the pilot symbol insertion rate becomes increased and that the data transmission efficiency decreases. It should be noted that the configuration of the pilot symbol to be inserted in the data symbol group is as follows.

[0615] "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during SISO transmission" and "Pilot symbol to be inserted into data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISO transmission" differ in the way pilot symbols are configured . This aspect is described below with respect to the drawings. Fig. 41 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a SISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 41, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Fig. 41 illustrates a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101 and a pilot symbol 4102. In this case, data is transmitted with a data symbol group #1 symbol 4101. Pilot symbol 4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, time synchronization, signal detection, and channel estimation (radio propagation environment estimation) at the receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is configured, for example, with a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol, which is known in the transmitter and receiver. The pilot symbol 4102 is most likely to be a PSK symbol.

[0616] FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of a "pilot symbol to be inserted into a group of data symbols during a MIMO transmission or a MISO transmission". It should be noted that in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. "During MIMO transmission or MISO transmission", modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas, respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. Fig. 42 illustrates an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #1 and an example of inserting a modulated signal pilot symbol #2 in combination.

[0617] Example 1

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

[0618] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. Both of the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

[0619] Then, "the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1" and "the first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2" are orthogonal (correlation is zero) in a certain cycle.

[0620] Example 2

Modulated signal case #1:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. The second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0621] Modulated signal case #2:

The first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and the second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42. The second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. The first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (the in-phase I component is 0 (zero) and the quadrature Q component is 0 (zero)). Therefore, the first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 cannot be referred to as a pilot symbol.

[0622] Fifth exemplary embodiment

The frame of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is described in the fourth exemplary embodiment with reference to FIG. 30-38. On each of the FIGS. 30-38, a frame is configured in a case where a group of data symbols is subjected to frequency division, and in a case where a group of data symbols is subjected to time division (time division). In this case, it is necessary to accurately transmit the frequency resources (carriers) and time resources to be used by each group of data symbols to the receiver.

[0623] In the present exemplary embodiment, an exemplary method for configuring control information related to frequency (frequency resources) and time (time resources) to be used by each data symbol group in the case of the frame configurations in FIG. 30-38. It should be noted that the frame configurations in FIG. 30-38 are only examples, and the detailed requirements of the frame configurations are as described in the fourth exemplary embodiment.

[0624] The case in which frequency division is performed

The following describes an example of a method for generating control information related to frequency resources and time resources to be used by each group of data symbols in case frequency division is performed.

[0625] FIG. 43 illustrates an example in the case where a group of data symbols is subjected to frequency division in a frame of a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. In FIG. 43, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fourth exemplary embodiments, the data symbol group may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0626] FIG. 43 illustrates a symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1. Data symbol group #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carriers 1-5 and by using times 1-16. However, the first carrier index is assumed to be "carrier 1", but not limited to "carrier 1", and also the first time index is assumed to be "time 1", but not limited to "time 1".

[0627] FIG. 43 illustrates the symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2. Data symbol group #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carriers 6-9 and by using times 1-5.

[0628] FIG. 43 illustrates the character 4303 of data character group #3. Data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carriers 10-14 and by using times 1-16.

[0629] FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4. Data symbol group #4 (4304) is transmitted by using carriers 6-9 and by using times 6-12.

[0630] FIG. 43 illustrates the character 4305 of data character group #5. Data symbol group #5 (4305) is transmitted by using carriers 6-9 and by using times 13-16.

[0631] First example

An example of control information related to frequency and time to be used by each group of data symbols in this case is described below.

[0632] The control information associated with the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #j is m(j, 0), m(j, 1), m(j, 2) and m(j, 3),

- control information related to the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #j is n(j, 0), n(j, 1), n(j, 2) and n(j, 3),

- control information associated with the default time position to be used by data character group #j is o(j, 0), o(j, 1), o(j, 2) and o(j, 3) , And

- control information related to the number of time slices to be used by data symbol group #j is p(j, 0), p(j, 1), p(j, 2) and p(j, 3).

[0633] In this case, when the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 1", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=0, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3 ).

[0634] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 2", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0635] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 3", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0636] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 4", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0637] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 5", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0638] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 6", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0639] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 7", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0640] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 8", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0641] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 9", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1 and sends m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0642] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 10", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1 and sends m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0643] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 11", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1 and sends m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0644] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 12", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1 and sends m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0645] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 13", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0646] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 14", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=0 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0647] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 15", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0648] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 16", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K, 1)=1 , m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1 and passes m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

[0649] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 1 carrier, the transmitter sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0650] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 2 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0651] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 3 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0652] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0653] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 5 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0654] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 6 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0655] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 7 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0656] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0657] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 9 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0658] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 10 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0659] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 11 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0660] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0661] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 13 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0662] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 14 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0663] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 15 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0664] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K, 2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1 and sends n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

[0665] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 1", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0666] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 2", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0667] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 3", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0668] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 4", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0669] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 5", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0670] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 6", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0671] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 7", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0672] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 8", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0673] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 9", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0674] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 10", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0675] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 11", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0676] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 12", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0677] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 13", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0678] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 14", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=0 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0679] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 15", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0680] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 16", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K, 1)=1 , o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1 and sends o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

[0681] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 1, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0682] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 2, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0683] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 3, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0684] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0685] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 5, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0686] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 6, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0687] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 7, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0688] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=0 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0689] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 9, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0690] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 10, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0691] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 11, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0692] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0693] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 13, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0694] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 14, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0695] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 15, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0696] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1 and p(K, 3)=1 and sends p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

[0697] The following describes the data symbol group #3 as an example.

[0698] Data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carriers 10-14 and by using times 1-16.

[0699] As a result, the default position of the carrier is carrier 10. Therefore, the transmitter sets m(3, 0)=1, m(3, 1)=0, m(3, 2)=0 and m(3 , 3)=1 and passes m(3, 0), m(3, 1), m(3, 2) and m(3, 3).

[0700] In addition, the number of carriers to be used is 5. Therefore, the transmitter sets n(3, 0)=0, n(3, 1)=0, n(3, 2)=1, and n( 3, 3)=0 and passes n(3, 0), n(3, 1), n(3, 2) and n(3, 3).

[0701] The default time position is time 1. Therefore, the transmitting device sets o(3, 0)=0, o(3, 1)=0, o(3, 2)=0 and o(3, 3) =0 and passes o(3, 0), o(3, 1), o(3, 2) and o(3, 3).

[0702] In addition, the number of time slices to be used is 16. Therefore, the transmitter sets p(3, 0)=1, p(3, 1)=1, p(3, 2)=1 and p (3, 3)=1 and passes p(3, 0), p(3, 1), p(3, 2) and p(3, 3).

[0703] Second example

Fig. 44 illustrates an example in the case where a group of data symbols is subjected to frequency division in a modulated signal frame configuration to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements in common with the elements in FIG. 43 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 44. In addition, in FIG. 44, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fourth exemplary embodiments, the data symbol group may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0704] The difference of FIG. 44 from FIG. 43 is that each group of data symbols has, for example, the number of carriers 4xA (A is an integer equal to or greater than 1), i.e. the number of carriers to be used by each data symbol group is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)), and has a number of time slices of 4xB (B is a natural number equal to or greater than 1), i.e. the number of time slices to be used by each group of data symbols is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)). However, the number of carriers to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of C (C is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero). In addition, the number of time slices to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero).

[0705] FIG. 44 illustrates a symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1. Data symbol group #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carriers 1-8, i. e. by using 8 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 1-16 (number of time slices is 16, a multiple of 4). However, the first carrier index is assumed to be "carrier 1", but not limited to "carrier 1", and also the first time index is assumed to be "time 1", but not limited to "time 1".

[0706] FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2. Data symbol group #4302 (4305) is transmitted by using carriers 9-12, i. e. by using 4 (multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 1-16 (the number of time slices is 4, a multiple of 4).

[0707] FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3. Data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carriers 13-16, i. e. by using 16 (multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 1-16 (the number of time slices is 4, a multiple of 4).

[0708] FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4. Data symbol group #4 (4304) is transmitted using carriers 9-12, i. e. by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 5-12 (the number of time slices is 8, a multiple of 4).

[0709] FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4305 of data symbol group #5. Data symbol group #5 (4305) is transmitted by using carriers 9-12, i. e. by using 4 (multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 13-16 (the number of time slices is 4 times 4).

[0710] When each group of data symbols is allocated to a frame according to such rules, it is possible to reduce:

is the number of bits of the above-described "control information associated with the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group #j",

is the number of bits of the above-described "control information related to the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #j",

is the number of bits of the above-described "control information associated with the default time position to be used by data symbol group #j", and

is the number of bits of the above-described "control information related to the number of slices of time to be used by the data symbol group #j", and

- it is possible to improve the efficiency of data (information) transmission.

[0711] In this case, the control information can be set as follows.

[0712] The control information associated with the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #j is m(j, 0) and m(j, 1),

- control information related to the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #j is n(j, 0) and n(j, 1),

- the control information associated with the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #j is o(j, 0) and o(j, 1), and

- control information related to the number of time slices to be used by data symbol group #j is p(j, 0) and p(j, 1).

[0713] In this case, when the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 1", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0 and m(K, 1)=0 and passes m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

[0714] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 5", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1 and m(K, 1)=0 and passes m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

[0715] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 9", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=0 and m(K, 1)=1 and passes m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

[0716] When the default position of the carrier to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "carrier 13", the transmitting device sets m(K, 0)=1 and m(K, 1)=1 and passes m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

[0717] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0 and n(K, 1)=0, and transmits n(K , 0) and n(K, 1).

[0718] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1 and n(K, 1)=0, and transmits n(K , 0) and n(K, 1).

[0719] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0 and n(K, 1)=1, and transmits n(K , 0) and n(K, 1).

[0720] When the number of carriers to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16 carriers, the transmitting device sets n(K, 0)=1 and n(K, 1)=1, and transmits n(K , 0) and n(K, 1).

[0721] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 1", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0 and o(K, 1)=0 and passes o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

[0722] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 5", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1 and o(K, 1)=0 and passes o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

[0723] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 9", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=0 and o(K, 1)=1 and passes o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

[0724] When the default time position to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is "time 13", the transmitting device sets o(K, 0)=1 and o(K, 1)=1 and passes o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

[0725] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0 and p(K, 1)=0, and transmits p(K , 0) and p(K, 1).

[0726] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1 and p(K, 1)=0, and transmits p(K , 0) and p(K, 1).

[0727] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=0 and p(K, 1)=1, and transmits p(K , 0) and p(K, 1).

[0728] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16, the transmitting device sets p(K, 0)=1 and p(K, 1)=1, and transmits p(K , 0) and p(K, 1).

[0729] The following describes the data symbol group #4 as an example.

[0730] FIG. 44 illustrates a symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4, and data symbol group #4 (4304) is transmitted by using carriers 9-12, i. by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using times 5-12 (the number of time slices is 8, a multiple of 4).

[0731] As a result, the default position of the carrier is carrier 9. Therefore, the transmitter sets m(3, 0)=0 and m(3, 1)=1, and transmits m(3, 0) and m(3, 1).

[0732] In addition, the number of carriers to be used is 4. Therefore, the transmitting device sets n(3, 0)=0 and n(3, 1)=0, and transmits n(3, 0) and n(3 , 1).

[0733] The default time position is time 5. Therefore, the transmitter sets o(3, 0)=1 and o(3, 1)=0, and transmits o(3, 0) and o(3, 1).

[0734] In addition, the number of time slices to be used is 8. Therefore, the transmitter sets p(3, 0)=1 and p(3, 1)=0, and transmits p(3, 0) and p( 3, 1).

[0735] Third example

The following describes a control information transmission method that differs from the control information transmission method of the second example when the frame configuration of a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmission apparatus in FIG. 1 is the configuration in FIG. 44.

[0736] FIG. 44, each group of data symbols has, for example, the number of carriers 4xA (A is an integer equal to or greater than 1), i. the number of carriers to be used by each data symbol group is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)), and has a number of time slices of 4xB (B is a natural number equal to or greater than 1), i.e. the number of time slices to be used by each group of data symbols is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)). However, the number of carriers to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of C (C is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero). In addition, the number of time slices to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero).

[0737] Therefore, region decomposition is performed as illustrated in FIG. 45. In FIG. 45, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Then there are carriers 1-16 and there are times 1-16 in accordance with FIG. 44. It should be noted that in FIG. 45, each area is configured with an area of 4×4=16 symbols of 4 carriers in the carrier direction and 4 time slices in the time direction. In the case of generalization using C and D as described above, each area is configured with a CxD symbol area of C carriers in the carrier direction and D time slices in the time direction.

[0738] FIG. 45, an area 4400 configured with carriers 1-4 and times 1-4 is referred to as area #0.

[0739] The area 4401 configured with carriers 5-8 and times 1-4 is referred to as area #1.

[0740] Area 4402 configured with carriers 9-12 and times 1-4 is referred to as area #2.

[0741] Area 4403 configured with carriers 13-16 and times 1-4 is referred to as area #3.

[0742] The area 4404 configured with carriers 1-4 and times 5-8 is referred to as area #4.

[0743] Area 4405 configured with carriers 5-8 and times 5-8 is referred to as area #5.

[0744] Area 4406 configured with carriers 9-12 and times 5-8 is referred to as area #6.

[0745] Area 4407 configured with carriers 13-16 and times 5-8 is referred to as area #7.

[0746] Area 4408 configured with carriers 9-12 and times 5-8 is referred to as area #8.

[0747] Area 4409 configured with carriers 5-8 and times 9-12 is referred to as area #9.

[0748] The area 4410 configured with carriers 9-12 and times 9-12 is referred to as area #10.

[0749] Area 4411 configured with carriers 13-16 and times 9-12 is referred to as area #11.

[0750] Area 4412 configured with carriers 1-4 and times 13-16 is referred to as area #12.

[0751] Area 4413 configured with carriers 5-8 and times 13-16 is referred to as area #13.

[0752] Area 4414 configured with carriers 9-12 and times 13-16 is referred to as area #14.

[0753] Area 4415 configured with carriers 13-16 and times 13-16 is referred to as area #15.

[0754] In this case, the transmission device in FIG. 1 transmits control information similar to the example described below to transmit frequency and time resource information used by each group of data symbols to the receiver.

[0755] When data symbol group #1 in FIG. 44 is subjected to region decomposition as illustrated in FIG. 45, data (information) is transmitted by using area #0 (4400), area #1 (4401), area #4 (4404), area #5 (4405), area #8 (4408), area #9 (4409) , areas #12 (4412) and areas #13 (4413). Therefore, the transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #1, control information indicating that:

"region #0 (4400), region #1 (4401), region #4 (4404), region #5 (4405), region #8 (4408), region #9 (4409), region #12 (4412) and area #13 (4413) are in use".

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #0 (4400), area #1 (4401), area #4 (4404), area #5 (4405), area #8 (4408), area #9 (4409), areas #12 (4412) and areas #13 (4413)).

[0756] Similarly, the transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #2 in FIG. 44, control information indicating that:

"area #2 (4402) in use".

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #2 (4402)).

[0757] The transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #3 in FIG. 44, control information indicating that:

"region #3 (4403), region #7 (4407), region #11 (4411), and region #15 (4415) are in use."

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #3 (4403), area #7 (4407), area #11 (4411), and area #15 (4415)).

[0758] The transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #4 in FIG. 44, control information indicating that:

"area #6 (4406) and area #10 (4410) are in use."

In this case, the control information includes area information (areas #6 (4406) and areas #10 (4410)).

[0759] The transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #5 in FIG. 44, control information indicating that:

"area #14 (4414) is in use."

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #14 (4414)).

[0760] As described above, in the "second example" and "third example", an advantage is provided that a small number of bits of used time and frequency resource information can be transmitted.

[0761] Meanwhile, in the "first example", such an advantage is provided that it is possible to allocate time and frequency resources more flexibly for a group of data symbols.

[0762] The case in which temporary (temporary) channel division is performed

The following describes an example of generating control information related to frequency resources and time resources to be used by each data symbol group in a case where temporal (temporal) channel division is performed.

[0763] Fourth example

Even in a case where time division is performed, control information is transmitted similar to the case where frequency division is performed. Therefore, the above-described "first example" is executed.

[0764] Fifth example

Even in a case where time division is performed, control information is transmitted similar to the case where frequency division is performed. Therefore, the above-described "Second Example" is executed.

[0765] Sixth Example

Even in a case where time division is performed, control information is transmitted similar to the case where frequency division is performed. Therefore, the above-described "third example" is executed.

[0766] Seventh example

e(X, Y) described in the second exemplary embodiment is transmitted as control information. Thus, information related to the number of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #j is e(j, 0) and e(j, 1).

[0767] In this case, for example:

When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 256 symbols, the transmitter sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K , 1).

[0768] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 512 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0769] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 1024 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0770] When the number of symbols in the data symbol group #(j=K) frame is 2048 symbols, the transmitting device sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1, and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

[0771] It should be noted that setting the number of characters is not limited to four jobs, and the transmitting device should be able to set only one or more types of number of characters.

[0772] Eighth example

The transmitter transmits information on the number of time slices that are required for each data symbol to the receiver, and the receiver receives this information, and thereby can recognize the frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol.

[0773] For example, information related to the number of time slices to be used in the data symbol group #j frame is q(j, 0), q(j, 1), q(j, 2), and q(j , 3).

[0774] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 1, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 0), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0775] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 2, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0776] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 3, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0777] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0778] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 5, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0779] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 6, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0780] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 7, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0781] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=0 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0782] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 9, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0783] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 10, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0784] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 11, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0785] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0786] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 13, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0787] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 14, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0788] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 15, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0789] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1 and q(K, 3)=1 and sends q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

[0790] FIG. 46 illustrates an example in which a group of data symbols undergoes time division (time) channelization in a frame of a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter of FIG. 1. In FIG. 46, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fourth exemplary embodiments, the data symbol group may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0791] FIG. 46, symbol 4301 is data symbol group #1, and data symbol group #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16 and by using times 1-4. Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded. However, the first carrier index is assumed to be "carrier 1", but not limited to "carrier 1", and also the first time index is assumed to be "time 1", but not limited to "time 1".

[0792] FIG. 46 illustrates a symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16 and by using times 5-12. Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded.

[0793] FIG. 46 illustrates a symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3, and data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16 and by using times 13-16. Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded.

[0794] For example, data symbol group #2 is transmitted by using times 5-12, i. the number of time slices is 8. Therefore, the transmitter sets q(2, 0)=1, q(2, 1)=1, q(2, 2)=1 and q(2, 3)=0 and transmits q( 2, 0), q(2, 1), q(2, 2) and q(2, 3).

[0795] Control information may also be generated for data symbol group #1 and data symbol #3 in a similar manner, and the transmitter in FIG. 1 sends q(1, 0), q(1, 1), q(1, 2) and q(1, 3) and q(2, 0), q(2, 1), q(2, 2) and q(2, 3) and q(3, 0), q(3, 1), q(3, 2) and q(3, 3).

[0796] The receiver in FIG. 23 accepts q(1, 0), q(1, 1), q(1, 2) and q(1, 3) and q(2, 0), q(2, 1), q(2, 2) and q(2, 3) and q(3, 0), q(3, 1), q(3, 2) and q(3, 3) and recognizes the frequency and time resources used by the data symbol groups. In this case, when it is assumed that the transmitter and receiver share the arrangement, for example, such that "data symbol group #1 is arranged in time first, and thereafter, data symbol group #2, data symbol group #3, data symbol group #4, data symbol group #5, . data. It becomes unnecessary for the transmitter to transmit information of the first time at which each group of data symbols is arranged. Therefore, the efficiency of data transmission is improved.

[0797] Ninth example

Unlike the "eighth example", each group of data symbols has, for example, a number of time slices 4xB (B is a natural number equal to or greater than 1), i.e. the number of time slices to be used by each group of data symbols is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)). However, the number of time slices to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero).

[0798] FIG. 46 illustrates a symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1, and data symbol group #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16, and by using times 1-4 (the number of time slices is 4, a multiple of 4). Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded. However, the first carrier index is assumed to be "carrier 1", but not limited to "carrier 1", and also the first time index is assumed to be "time 1", but not limited to "time 1".

[0799] FIG. 46 illustrates a symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16, and by using times 5-12 (the number of time slices is 8, a multiple of 4). Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded.

[0800] FIG. 46 illustrates a symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3, and data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carriers 1-16, and by using times 13-16 (the number of time slices is 8, a multiple of 4). Thus, all carriers that can be allocated as data symbols are used. It should be noted that when there are carriers for arranging the pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, such carriers are excluded.

[0801] When each group of data symbols is allocated to a frame according to such rules, it is possible to reduce:

- the number of bits of the above-described "information related to the number of time slices to be used in the frame of data symbol group #j", and

- it is possible to improve the efficiency of data (information) transmission.

[0802] In this case, the control information can be set as follows.

[0803] Information related to the number of time slices to be used in the data symbol group #j frame is q(j, 0) and q(j, 1).

[0804] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 4, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0 and q(K, 1)=0, and transmits q(K , 0) and q(K, 1).

[0805] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 8, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1 and q(K, 1)=0, and transmits q(K , 0) and q(K, 1).

[0806] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 12, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=0 and q(K, 1)=1, and transmits q(K , 0) and q(K, 1).

[0807] When the number of time slices to be used by the data symbol group #(j=K) is 16, the transmitting device sets q(K, 0)=1 and q(K, 1)=1, and transmits q(K , 0) and q(K, 1).

[0808] For example, data symbol group #2 in FIG. 46 is transmitted by using times 5-12, ie. the number of time slices is 8. Therefore, the transmitter sets q(2, 0)=1 and q(2, 1)=0 and transmits q(2, 0) and q(2, 1).

[0809] Control information may also be generated for data symbol group #1 and data symbol #3 in a similar manner, and the transmitter in FIG. 1 sends q(1, 0) and q(1, 1) and q(2, 0) and q(2, 1) and q(3, 0) and q(3, 1).

[0810] The receiver in FIG. 23 receives q(1, 0) and q(1, 1) and q(2, 0) and q(2, 1) and q(3, 0) and q(3, 1) and recognizes frequency and time resources, used by data character groups. In this case, when it is assumed that the transmitter and receiver share the arrangement, for example, such that "data symbol group #1 is arranged in time first, and thereafter, data symbol group #2, data symbol group #3, data symbol group #4, data symbol group #5, . data. It becomes unnecessary for the transmitter to transmit information of the first time at which each group of data symbols is arranged. Therefore, the efficiency of data transmission is improved.

[0811] Tenth Example

Unlike the "eighth example", each group of data symbols has, for example, a number of time slices 4xB (B is a natural number equal to or greater than 1), i.e. the number of time slices to be used by each group of data symbols is a multiple of 4 (but excluding 0 (zero)). Thus, the same as the "ninth example" is applied. However, the number of time slices to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4 and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or greater than 2) except for 0 (zero).

[0812] Therefore, region decomposition is performed as illustrated in FIG. 47. In FIG. 47, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Then there are carriers 1-16 and there are times 1-16 in accordance with FIG. 46. It should be noted that in FIG. 47, each area is configured with an area of 16×4=64 symbols of 16 carriers in the carrier direction and 4 time slices in the time direction. In the case of generalization using C and D as described above, each area is configured with a CxD symbol area of C carriers in the carrier direction and D time slices in the time direction.

[0813] FIG. 47, the area 4700 configured with time 1-4 is referred to as area #0.

[0814] The area 4701 configured with times 5-8 is referred to as area #1.

[0815] The area 4702 configured with times 9-12 is referred to as area #2.

[0816] The area 4703 configured with times 13-16 is referred to as area #3.

[0817] In this case, the transmission device in FIG. 1 transmits control information similar to the example described below to transmit frequency and time resource information used by each group of data symbols to the receiver.

[0818] When data symbol group #1 in FIG. 46 is decomposed into regions as shown in FIG. 47, data (information) is transmitted by using area #0 (4700). Therefore, the transmitter in FIG. 1 transmission as data character group #1 control information indicating that:

"area #0 (4700) in use".

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #0 (4700)).

[0819] The transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #5 in FIG. 46, control information indicating that:

"area #1 (4701) and area #2 (4702) are in use."

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #1 (4701) and area #2 (4702)).

[0820] The transmitter in FIG. 1 transmits, as data symbol group #3 in FIG. 46, control information indicating that:

"region #3 (4703) in use".

In this case, the control information includes area information (area #3 (4703)).

[0821] Control information in the course of temporary (time) division is described in the "fourth to tenth examples". For example, when the "fourth example", "fifth example", and "sixth example" are used, the frequency division control information and the control information during the time division (time) division can be configured in the same way.

[0822] Meanwhile, in the case of the "seventh to tenth examples", the transmitting device transmits "control information related to the use of time and frequency resources in the course of frequency division, and frequency division control information related to the use of time and frequency resources in time division (temporal) channel division" having different configurations by using a first preamble and/or a second preamble.

[0823] It should be noted that, for example, in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202 includes control information related to the use of time and frequency resources during frequency division, and the first preamble 501 and/or the second preamble 502 may be configured to include control information associated with the use of time and frequency resources during time (time) division of channels.

[0824] Similarly, in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 25, 28, and 32, the first preamble 201 and/or the second preamble 202 include control information related to the use of time and frequency resources during frequency division, and may be configured such that the first preamble 501 and/or the second preamble 502 include control information related to the use of time and frequency resources during time division (time) channelization.

[0825] In addition, in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 36, the first preambles 201 and 501 and/or the second preambles 202 and 502 include control information related to the use of time and frequency resources during frequency division, and may be configured such that the first preamble 3601 and/or the second preamble 3602 include control information related to the use of time and frequency resources during time division (time) channelization.

[0826] As described above, in the "fifth example", "sixth example", "ninth example", and "tenth example", an advantage is provided that a small number of bits of used time and frequency resource information can be transmitted.

[0827] Meanwhile, in the "fourth example", "seventh example", and "eighth example", an advantage is provided that it is possible to allocate time and frequency resources to a group of data symbols more flexibly.

[0828] Similar to the examples described above, the transmitting device transmits control information associated with the use of time and frequency resources during frequency division of channels, and control information associated with the use of time and frequency resources during time (time) division of channels, and in By virtue of this, the receiver can recognize the usage state of the time and frequency resources of the data symbol groups and can accurately demodulate and decode the data.

[0829] Sixth exemplary embodiment

Some examples of the frame configuration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 are described in the first to fifth exemplary embodiment. The frame configuration different from the frame configurations described in the first to fifth exemplary embodiment in the present exemplary embodiment will be described below.

[0830] FIG. 48 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1. Elements operating in the same way as shown in FIG. 5 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 48. In addition, in FIG. 48, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the group of data symbols may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0831] The difference of FIG. 48 from FIG. 5 is that the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in FIG. 5 do not exist. Then, control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol group #2 (402) in the frequency direction. It should be noted that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol for frame sync, frequency sync, and time sync, a symbol for notification of frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information associated with a modulation method for generating a data symbol group, and information associated with an error correction method for generating a data symbol group, examples of which include code related information, code length related information, coding rate related information, and so on.

[0832] FIG. 49 illustrates a configuration example in a case where control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol group #2 (402) in the frequency direction.

[0833] FIG. 49, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Fig. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902, and 4903, which are #X groups of data symbols. In FIG. 48, X is 1 or 2, and 4904 and 4905 are control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control).

[0834] As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905) are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency). It should be noted that these particular carriers may or may not include symbols other than control information symbols.

[0835] For example, X=1 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

[0836] Similarly, X=2 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

[0837] It should be noted that when there are, for example, carriers #1-#100 in the case where frequency division is performed as shown in FIG. 48, in order to arrange control information symbols in the frequency and time domains in which a group of data symbols are arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged on specific carriers, for example, carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols may be arranged according to the arrangement of data symbol groups.

[0838] The following describes an advantage in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 48.

[0839] In the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the receiver needs to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in order to demodulate and decode data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 and obtain information. For this reason, the receiver must receive a modulated bandwidth signal in order to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202.

[0840] Under such circumstances, when a terminal that only needs data symbol group #2 is provided, a frame configuration to enable data symbol group #2 to be demodulated and decoded with only the bandwidth occupied by data symbol group #2 is required in order to to provide flexible terminal design, and in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 48, it is possible to implement this frame configuration.

[0841] When a frame is configured as shown in FIG. 48, control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are inserted into data symbol group #2 in the frequency direction, as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receiver can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by receiving modulated bandwidth signals of data symbol group #2 only. Therefore, a flexible design solution for the terminal becomes possible.

[0842] Next, a case will be described in which the frame configuration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is the frame configuration of FIG. 50. Elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 25 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 50. In addition, in FIG. 50, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the group of data symbols may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0843] The difference of FIG. 50 from FIG. 25 is that the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in FIG. 25 do not exist. Then, control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (2501), data symbol group #2 (2502), and data symbol group #4 (2503) in the frequency direction. It should be noted that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol for frame sync, frequency sync, and time sync, a symbol for notification of frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information associated with a modulation method for generating a data symbol group, and information associated with an error correction method for generating a data symbol group, examples of which include code related information, code length related information, coding rate related information, and so on.

[0844] FIG. 49 illustrates a configuration example in a case where control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (2501), data symbol group #2 (2502), and data symbol group #4 (2503). ) data symbols in frequency direction.

[0845] FIG. 49, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Fig. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902, and 4903, which are #X groups of data symbols. For example, in FIG. 50, X is 1, 2, or 4, and 4904 and 4905 are control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control).

[0846] As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905) are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency). It should be noted that these particular carriers may or may not include symbols other than control information symbols.

[0847] For example, X=1 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

[0848] Similarly, X=2 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

[0849] X=4 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #4.

[0850] It should be noted that when there are, for example, carriers #1-#100 in the case where frequency division is performed as shown in FIG. 50, in order to arrange control information symbols in the frequency and time domains in which a group of data symbols are arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged on specific carriers, for example, carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols may be arranged according to the arrangement of data symbol groups.

[0851] The following describes an advantage in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 50.

[0852] In the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 25, the receiver needs to obtain the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in order to demodulate and decode data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2, and data symbol group #4 and obtain information. For this reason, the receiver must receive a modulated bandwidth signal in order to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202.

[0853] Under such circumstances, when a terminal requiring only data symbol group #2 is provided, a frame configuration to enable data symbol group #2 to be demodulated and decoded with only the bandwidth occupied by data symbol group #2 is required in order to to provide flexible terminal design, and in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 50, it is possible to implement this frame configuration.

[0854] When a frame is configured as shown in FIG. 50, control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are inserted into data symbol group #2 in the frequency direction, as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receiver can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by receiving modulated bandwidth signals of data symbol group #2 only. Therefore, a flexible design solution for the terminal becomes possible.

[0855] Next, a case will be described in which the frame configuration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is the frame configuration of FIG. 51. Elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 28 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 51. In addition, in FIG. 51, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the group of data symbols may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0856] The difference of FIG. 51 from FIG. 28 is that the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in FIG. 28 do not exist. Then, control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (2701) and data symbol group #2 (2702) in the frequency direction. It should be noted that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol for frame sync, frequency sync, and time sync, a symbol for notification of frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information associated with a modulation method for generating a data symbol group, and information associated with an error correction method for generating a data symbol group, examples of which include code related information, code length related information, coding rate related information, and so on.

[0857] FIG. 49 illustrates a configuration example in a case where control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (2701) and data symbol group #2 (2702) in the frequency direction.

[0858] FIG. 49, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. Fig. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902, and 4903, which are #X groups of data symbols. For example, in FIG. 51, X is 1 or 2, and 4904 and 4905 are control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control).

[0859] As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905) are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency). It should be noted that these particular carriers may or may not include symbols other than control information symbols.

[0860] For example, X=1 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

[0861] Similarly, X=2 is satisfied in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

[0862] It should be noted that when there are, for example, carriers #1-#100 in the case where frequency division is performed as shown in FIG. 51, in order to arrange control information symbols in the frequency and time domains in which a group of data symbols are arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged on specific carriers, for example, carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols may be arranged according to the arrangement of data symbol groups.

[0863] The following describes an advantage in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 51.

[0864] In the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 28, the receiver needs to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in order to demodulate and decode data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 and obtain information. For this reason, the receiver must receive a modulated bandwidth signal in order to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202.

[0865] Under such circumstances, when a terminal that only needs data symbol group #2 is provided, a frame configuration to enable data symbol group #2 to be demodulated and decoded with only the bandwidth occupied by data symbol group #2 is required to to provide flexible terminal design, and in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 51, it is possible to implement this frame configuration.

[0866] When a frame is configured as shown in FIG. 51, control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are inserted into data symbol group #2 in the frequency direction, as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receiver can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by receiving modulated bandwidth signals of data symbol group #2 only. Therefore, a flexible design solution for the terminal becomes possible.

[0867] Next, a case will be described in which the frame configuration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is the frame configuration of FIG. 52. Elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 32 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 52. In addition, in FIG. 52, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the group of data symbols may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0868] The difference of FIG. 52 from FIG. 32 is that the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in FIG. 32 do not exist. Then, control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003), group #4 (3004) data symbols, group #5 (3005) data symbols, and group #6 (3006) data symbols in the frequency direction. It should be noted that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol for frame sync, frequency sync, and time sync, a symbol for notification of frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information associated with a modulation method for generating a data symbol group, and information associated with an error correction method for generating a data symbol group, examples of which include code related information, code length related information, coding rate related information, and so on.

[0869] However, control information symbols are not necessarily arranged in all of data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003), data symbol group #4 (3004) , group #5 (3005) of data symbols, and group #6 (3006) of data symbols in the frequency direction. This aspect is described below with reference to FIG. 53.

[0870] FIG. 53 illustrates an arrangement example of control information symbols at time t1-t3 in FIG. 52. In the case of FIG. 52, data symbol groups 5301, 5302, and 5303 include any of data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003), data symbol group #4 (3004). , group #5 (3005) data symbols, and group #6 (3006) data symbols.

[0871] FIG. 53 illustrates control information symbols 5304 and 5305, and control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in the frequency direction. The control information symbol 5304 is arranged on a particular carrier as illustrated in FIG. 53. In addition, the control information symbol 5305 is arranged on a specific carrier (subcarrier or frequency) as illustrated in FIG. 53. It should be noted that this particular carrier may or may not include symbols other than control information symbols.

[0872] When there are, for example, carriers #1-#100, in case the frequency division is performed as shown in FIG. 52, in order to arrange control information symbols in the frequency and time domains in which a group of data symbols are arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged on specific carriers, for example, carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols may be arranged according to the arrangement of data symbol groups.

[0873] The following describes an advantage in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 52.

[0874] In the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 32, the receiver must receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 to demodulate and decode data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003), data symbol group #4 (3004). ) data symbols, data symbol group #5 (3005) and data symbol group #6 (3006) and receive information. For this reason, the receiver must receive a modulated bandwidth signal in order to receive the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202.

[0875] Under such circumstances, when a terminal that only needs data symbol group #2 is provided, a frame configuration to enable data symbol group #2 to be demodulated and decoded with only the bandwidth occupied by data symbol group #2 is required in order to to provide flexible terminal design, and in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 52, it is possible to implement this frame configuration.

[0876] When a frame is configured as shown in FIG. 52, control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are inserted into the group of data symbols in the frequency direction, as illustrated in FIG. 53. For this reason, the receiver can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by receiving modulated bands around data symbol group #2. Therefore, a flexible design solution for the terminal becomes possible.

[0877] Next, a case will be described in which the frame configuration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitter in FIG. 1 is the frame configuration of FIG. 54. Elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 36 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 54. In addition, in FIG. 54, the vertical axis indicates frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time. It should be noted that similarly to the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the group of data symbols may have symbols of any of the SISO method (SIMO method), MIMO method, and MISO method.

[0878] The difference of FIG. 54 from FIG. 36 is that the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 and the first preamble 501 and the second preamble 502 in FIG. 36 do not exist. Then, control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplex Configuration Control), are arranged in data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbol group #3 (3403), group #4 (3404) data characters, group #5 (3405) data characters, group #6 (3406) data characters, group #7 (3407) data characters, group #8 (3408) data characters, group #9 (3509) data characters , data symbol group #10 (3510), data symbol group #11 (3511), data symbol group #12 (3512), and data symbol group #13 (3513) in the frequency direction. It should be noted that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol for frame sync, frequency sync, and time sync, a symbol for notification of frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information associated with a modulation method for generating a data symbol group, and information associated with an error correction method for generating a data symbol group, examples of which include code related information, code length related information, coding rate related information, and so on.

[0879] However, control information symbols are not necessarily arranged in all of data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbol group #3 (3403), data symbol group #4 (3404) , group #5 (3405) data characters, group #6 (3406) data characters, group #7 (3407) data characters, group #8 (3408) data characters, group #9 (3509) data characters, group #10 ( 3510) data symbols, group #11 (3511) data symbols, group #12 (3512) data symbols, and group #13 (3513) data symbols in the frequency direction. This aspect is described below with reference to FIG. 53.

[0880] FIG. 53 illustrates an arrangement example of control information symbols at time t1-t3 in FIG. 54. In the case of FIG. 54, data symbol groups 5301, 5302, and 5303 include any of data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbol group #3 (3403), data symbol group #4 (3404). , group #5 (3405) data characters, group #6 (3406) data characters, group #7 (3407) data characters, group #8 (3408) data characters, group #9 (3509) data characters, group #10 ( 3510) data characters, group #11 (3511) data characters, group #12 (3512) data characters, and group #13 (3513) data characters.

[0881] FIG. 53 illustrates control information symbols 5304 and 5305, and control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in the frequency direction. The control information symbol 5304 is arranged on a particular carrier as illustrated in FIG. 53. In addition, the control information symbol 5305 is arranged on a specific carrier (subcarrier or frequency) as illustrated in FIG. 53. It should be noted that this particular carrier may or may not include symbols other than control information symbols.

[0882] When there are, for example, carriers #1-#100, in case the frequency division is performed as shown in FIG. 54, in order to arrange control information symbols in the frequency and time domains in which a group of data symbols are arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged on specific carriers, for example, carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols may be arranged according to the arrangement of data symbol groups.

[0883] The following describes an advantage in the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 54.

[0884] In the case of the frame configuration in FIG. 36, the receiver must receive the first preamble 201, the second preamble 202, the first preamble 501 and the second preamble 502 in order to demodulate and decode data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), group #3 (3403) data characters, group #4 (3404) data characters, group #5 (3405) data characters, group #6 (3406) data characters, group #7 (3407) data characters, group #8 (3408) data characters, group # 9 (3509) data symbols, group #10 (3510) data symbols, group #11 (3511) data symbols, group #12 (3512) data symbols, and group #13 (3513) data symbols and receive information. For this reason, the receiver must receive a modulated bandwidth signal to receive the first preamble 201, the second preamble 202, the first preamble 501, and the second preamble 502.

[0885] Under such circumstances, when a terminal that only needs data symbol group #2 is provided, a frame configuration to enable data symbol group #2 to be demodulated and decoded with only the bandwidth occupied by data symbol group #2 is required in order to to provide flexible terminal design, and in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 54, it is possible to implement this frame configuration.

[0886] When a frame is configured as shown in FIG. 54, control information symbols, examples of which are TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in a group of data symbols in the frequency direction, as illustrated in FIG. 53. For this reason, the receiver can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by receiving modulated bands around data symbol group #2. Therefore, a flexible design solution for the terminal becomes possible.

[0887] Similar to the above example, when a group of data symbols is arranged by using frequency division, the control information symbols are arranged in the frequency direction, and thus, the effect of enabling flexible design of the terminal can be obtained. It should be noted that the control information symbols associated with the group of data symbols arranged by using time division channels are contained in the first preamble and the second preamble, as illustrated in FIG. 48, 50, 51, 52 and 54.

[0888] It should be noted that the control information associated with the data symbol group subjected to frequency division channels may be contained in the first preamble and the second preamble, or the control information associated with the data symbol group subjected to time (time) division channels may be contained in symbols (4904, 4905, 5304, and 5305) of the control information illustrated in FIG. 49 and 53.

[0889] Seventh exemplary embodiment

The case in which the phase change is performed on the modulated signal is described in the first to sixth exemplary embodiments, in particular, in the first exemplary embodiment. In the present exemplary embodiment, a method for performing a phase change on a group of data symbols subjected to frequency division is specifically described below.

[0890] The first exemplary embodiment describes a phase change that is performed on all of baseband signals s1(t) and s1(i) and baseband signals s2(t) and s2(i) of either or signals s1( t) and s1(i) in the baseband, or signals s2(t) and s2(i) in the baseband. As features of the present method, no phase change is performed for, for example, pilot symbols (examples of which are the reference symbol, unique word, and postamble), first preamble, second preamble, and control information symbols other than symbols for signaling s ₁ (t ) in the baseband and signal s ₂ (t) in the baseband in the transmission frame.

[0891] Further, the following cases are provided in a method for performing a phase change on a group of data symbols subjected to frequency division, which includes "performing a phase change on all of the baseband signals s1(t) and s1(i) and the signals s2(t) and s2(i) in the baseband, or either signals s1(t) and s1(i) in the baseband, or signals s2(t) and s2(i) in the baseband."

[0892] First case:

The first case will be described below with reference to FIG. 55. In FIG. 55, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency. Part (A) of FIG. 55 illustrates the frame configuration of modulated signals z ₁ (t) and z ₁ (i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Part (B) of FIG. 55 illustrates the frame configuration of modulated signals z ₂ (t) and z ₂ (i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Modulated signal symbols z ₁ (t) and z ₁ (i) and modulated signal symbols z ₂ (t) and z ₂ (i) for identical time and identical frequency (identical carrier number) are transmitted from different antennas.

[0893] FIG. 55, the symbols described as "P" are pilot symbols, and as described above, no phase change is performed for the pilot symbols. In (A) and (B) of FIG. 55, symbols other than the symbols described as "P" are symbols for data transmission, namely, data symbols. It should be noted that in (A) and (B) of FIG. 55, the frame is configured with data symbols and pilot symbols, but this configuration is only an example, and as described above, symbols such as control information symbols may be contained. In this case, the phase change is not performed, for example, for control information symbols.

[0894] Part (A) of FIG. 55 illustrates an area 5501 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged and an area 5502 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. Then (B) in FIG. 55 illustrates an area 5503 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged and an area 5504 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. As a result, in the examples in FIG. 55, groups of data symbols are subjected to frequency division and assembled.

[0895] In the groups of data symbols in FIG. 55, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any 7 types of phase change of "phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5, and phase change $6" are performed.

[0896] In the symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5501 in (A) of FIG. 55, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $0". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0897] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $1". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0898] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0899] In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5502 in (A) of FIG. 55, there is, for example, a character described as "%0 $0". In this case, "%0" means the "null character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0900] In addition, there is a character described as "%1 $1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0901] Therefore, there are characters described as "%X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0902] In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5503 in (B) of FIG. 55, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $0". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0903] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $1". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0904] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0905] In the symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5504 in (B) of FIG. 55, there is, for example, a character described as "%0 $0". In this case, "%0" means the "null character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0906] In addition, there is a character described as "%1 $1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0907] Therefore, there are characters described as "%X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0908] In this case, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in the data symbol of the modulated signal z ₁ . For example, "a phase change of (2×0 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of (2×1 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of (2×2 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "a phase change of (2×3 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "a phase change of (2×4 x π )/14 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of (2×5 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of (2×6 x π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $6" (However, the value of phase change is not limited to these values.)

[0909] Then, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in the data symbol of the modulated signal z ₂ . For example, "a phase change of -(2×0 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of -(2×1 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of phase in -(2×2 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "phase change in -(2×3 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "phase change in -( 2×4 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of -(2×5 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of -(2×6 x π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $6" (However, the value of phase change is not limited to these values).

[0910] It should be noted that, as described above, the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal z ₁ and may not be performed on the modulated signal z ₂ . In addition, the phase change may not be performed on the modulated signal z ₁ , and the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal z ₂ .

[0911] Indications of the first case are that "7 phase change cycles are performed in data symbol group #1 along with data symbol group #2". Thus, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in the data symbols of the whole frame, regardless of the data symbol group belonging.

[0912] Second case:

The second case will be described below with reference to FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency. Part (B) of FIG. 56 illustrates the frame configuration of modulated signals z ₁ (t) and z ₁ (i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Part (B) of FIG. 56 illustrates the frame configuration of modulated signals z ₂ (t) and z ₂ (i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Modulated signal symbols z ₁ (t) and z ₁ (i) and modulated signal symbols z ₂ (t) and z ₂ (i) for the same time and the same frequency, namely the same carrier number, are transmitted from different antennas.

[0913] FIG. 56, the symbols described as "P" are pilot symbols, and as described above, phase change is not performed for the pilot symbols. In (A) and (B) of FIG. 56, symbols other than the symbols described as "P" are symbols for data transmission, namely, data symbols. It should be noted that in FIG. 56A and 56B, the frame is configured with data symbols and pilot symbols, but this configuration is only an example, and as discussed above, symbols such as control information symbols may be contained. In this case, the phase change is not performed, for example, for control information symbols.

[0914] Part (A) of FIG. 56 illustrates an area 5501 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged and an area 5502 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. Then (B) in FIG. 56 illustrates an area 5503 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged and an area 5504 in which data symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. As a result, in the example of FIG. 56, groups of data symbols are subjected to frequency separation and arranged.

0 фазы, изменения

1 фазы, изменения

2 фазы, изменения

3 фазы и изменения

4 фазы".[0915] In data symbol group #1 in FIG. 56, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any 7 types of phase change of "phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5, and phase change $6" are performed. Then, in data symbol group #2 in FIG. 56, there are 5 phase change cycles, and any 5 types of phase change from "change

0 phase, change

1 phase, changes

2 phases, changes

3 phases and changes

4 phases".

[0916] In the symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5501 in (A) of FIG. 56, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $0". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0917] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $1". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0918] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

0". В этом случае, "%0" означает "нулевой символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

0" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

0 фазы".[0919] In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5502 in (A) of FIG. 56, there is, for example, a character described as "%0

0". In this case, "%0" means "null character" of group #2 data characters. Then "

0" means performing phase change for "change

0 phase".

1". В этом случае, "%1" означает "первый символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

1" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

1 фазы".[0920] In addition, there is a character described as "%1

1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "

1" means performing a phase change for "change

1 phase".

Y" (X является целым числом, равным или большим 0, и Y является целым числом, равным или большим 0 и равным или меньшим 4). В этом случае, "%X" означает "X-тый символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

Y" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

Y фазы".[0921] Therefore, there are characters described as "%X

Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 4). In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of the data character group #2 . Then "

Y" means performing phase change for "change

Y phase".

[0922] In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5503 in (B) of FIG. 56, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $0". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0923] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $1". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0924] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

0". В этом случае, "%0" означает "нулевой символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

0" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

0 фазы".[0925] In the symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5504 in (B) of FIG. 56, there is, for example, a character described as "%0

0". In this case, "%0" means "null character" of group #2 data characters. Then "

0" means performing phase change for "change

0 phase".

1". В этом случае, "%1" означает "первый символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

1" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

1 фазы".[0926] In addition, there is a character described as "%1

1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "

1" means performing a phase change for "change

1 phase".

Y" (X является целым числом, равным или большим 0, и Y является целым числом, равным или большим 0 и равным или меньшим 4). В этом случае, "%X" означает "X-тый символ" группы #2 символов данных. Затем "

Y" означает выполнение изменения фазы для "изменения

Y фазы".[0927] Therefore, there are characters described as "%X

Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 4). In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of the data character group #2 . Then "

Y" means performing phase change for "change

Y phase".

[0928] In this case, 7 phase change cycles are performed in group #1 of modulated signal data symbols z ₁ . For example, "a phase change of (2×0 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of (2×1 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of (2×2 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "a phase change of (2×3 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "a phase change of (2×4 x π )/14 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of (2×5 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of (2×6 x π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $6" (However, the value of phase change is not limited to these values.)

[0929] Then, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in group #1 of data symbols of the modulated signal z ₂ . For example, "a phase change of -(2×0 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of -(2×1 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of phase in -(2×2 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "phase change in -(2×3 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "phase change in -( 2×4 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of -(2×5 x π)/14 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of -(2×6 x π)/14 radians is done as a $6 phase change". However, the phase change value is not limited to these values.

[0930] It should be noted that, as described above, the phase change may be performed in group #1 of modulated signal data symbols z ₁ and may not be performed in group #1 of modulated signal data symbols z ₂ . Also, the phase change may not be performed in the modulated signal data symbol group #1 z ₁ , and the phase change may be performed in the modulated signal data symbol group #1 z ₂ .

0 фазы", "изменение фазы в (2×1 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

1 фазы", "изменение фазы в (2×2 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

2 фазы", "изменение фазы в (2×3 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

3 фазы", и "изменение фазы в (2×4 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

4 фазы". Тем не менее значение изменения фазы не ограничено этими значениями.[0931] Then, 5 phase change cycles are performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₁ . For example, "a phase change of (2×0 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

0 phase", "a phase change in (2×1 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

1 phase", "a phase change in (2×2 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

2 phase", "a phase change in (2×3 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

3 phase" and "a phase change of (2×4 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

4 phase". However, the phase change value is not limited to these values.

0 фазы", "изменение фазы в -(2×1 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

1 фазы", "изменение фазы в -(2×2 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

2 фазы", "изменение фазы в -(2×3 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

3 фазы", и "изменение фазы в -(2×4 x π)/10 радиан выполняется в качестве изменения

4 фазы". Тем не менее значение изменения фазы не ограничено этими значениями.[0932] Then, 5 phase change cycles are performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₂ . For example, "a phase change of -(2×0 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

0 phase", "a phase change of -(2×1 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

1 phase", "a phase change of -(2×2 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

2 phase", "a phase change of -(2×3 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

3 phase" and "a phase change of -(2×4 x π)/10 radians is performed as a change

4 phase". However, the phase change value is not limited to these values.

[0933] It should be noted that, as described above, the phase change may be performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₁ and may not be performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₂ . In addition, the phase change may not be performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₁ , and the phase change may be performed in group #2 of modulated signal data symbols z ₂ .

[0934] The indications of the second case are that "7 phase change cycles are performed in data symbol group #1, and also 5 phase change cycles are performed in data symbol group #2". Thus, a unique phase change is performed in each group of data symbols. However, the same phase change can be performed on different data symbols.

[0935] Third case:

Fig. 57 illustrates the relationship between the transmitting station and the terminal in the case of the third case. Terminal #3 (5703) may receive modulated signal #1 to be transmitted by transmitting station #1 (5701) and modulated signal #2 to be transmitted by transmitting station #2 (5702). For example, in band A, identical data is transmitted in modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. That is, when the baseband signal mapped to the data sequence by the specific modulation method is s1(t, f), the transmission station #1 and the transmission station #2 transmit modulated signals based on s1(t, f). Note that t represents time and f represents frequency.

[0936] Therefore, terminal #3 (5703) receives both of the modulated signal transmitted by the transmission station #1 and the modulated signal transmitted by the transmission station #2 in frequency band A, and demodulates and decodes the data.

[0937] FIG. 58 is an example of the configuration of the transmission station #1 and the transmission station #2. The following explains the case in which the transmission station #1 and the transmission station #2 transmit modulated signals based on s1(t, f), similar to the frequency band A as described above.

[0938] An error correcting encoder 5802 receives an input of information 5801 and a signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The error correction encoder 5802 performs error correction encoding based on the information associated with the error correction encoding method contained in the signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The error correction encoder 5802 outputs data 5803.

[0939] The display module 5804 receives data input 5803 and signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The mapper 5804 performs mapping based on the information associated with the modulation method contained in the signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The mapping module 5804 outputs the baseband signal s1(t, f) 5805. It should be noted that data interleaving, i.e. data reordering may be performed between the error correction encoder 5802 and the display module 5804 .

[0940] The control information symbol generator 5807 receives input of control information 5806 and information 5813 related to the transmission method. The control information symbol generator 5807 generates a control information symbol based on the transmission method-related information contained in the transmission method-related signal 5813. The control information symbol generator 5807 outputs a control information symbol baseband signal 5808.

[0941] The pilot symbol generator 5809 receives an input of a signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. Pilot symbol generator 5809 generates a pilot symbol based on signal 5813. Pilot symbol generator 5809 outputs a pilot symbol baseband signal 5810.

[0942] The transmission method instruction module 5812 receives input of information 5811 with instructions on the transmission method. The transmission method instruction module 5812 generates and outputs a signal 5813 associated with the transmission method.

[0943] The phase shifter 5814 receives inputs of the baseband signal s1(t, f) 5805, the control information symbol baseband signal 5808, the pilot symbol baseband signal 5810, and the transmission method associated signal 5813. The phase changer 5814 performs the phase change based on the frame configuration information contained in the signal 5813 associated with the transmission method and based on the information associated with the phase change. The phase changer 5814 outputs the baseband signal 5815 based on the frame configuration. Note that details will be described below with reference to FIG. 59 and 60.

[0944] The radio module 5816 receives baseband signal input 5815 based on the frame configuration and signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The radio module 5816 performs processing such as interleaving, inverse Fourier transform, and frequency conversion based on the signal 5813 associated with the transmission method. The radio module 5816 generates and outputs the transmit signal 5817. The transmit signal 5817 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 5818.

[0945] FIG. 59 illustrates a configuration example of a modulated signal (transmit signal) frame to be transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 58. In FIG. 59, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency. In FIG. 59, the symbols described as "P" are pilot symbols, and as features of the third case, a phase change is performed for the pilot symbols. In addition, the symbols described as "C" are control information symbols, and as features of the third case, phase change is performed for the control information symbols. It should be noted that FIG. 59 is an example in the case where the control information symbols are arranged in the direction of the time axis.

[0946] In the frame of FIG. 59, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any 7 types of phase change of "phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5, and phase change $6" are performed.

[0947] In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5901 in FIG. 59, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $1". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0948] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $2". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$2" means to perform phase change for "phase change $2".

[0949] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0950] In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5902 in FIG. 59, there is, for example, a character described as "%0 $3". In this case, "%0" means the "null character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$3" means to perform phase change for "phase change $3".

[0951] In addition, there is a character described as "%1 $1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$4" means to perform phase change for "phase change $4".

[0952] Therefore, there are symbols described as "%X $Y". X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6. In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of the data character group #2. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0953] In addition, in FIG. 59, there is a character described as "C $0". In this case, "C" means a control information character, and "$0" means performing a phase change for "phase change $0".

[0954] Therefore, there are characters described as "C $Y". Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6. In this case, "C" means a control information character, and "$Y" means performing a phase change for "phase change $Y".

[0955] In addition, in FIG. 59, there are symbols described as "P $0", for example. In this case, "P" means a pilot symbol, and "$0" means performing a phase change for "phase change $0".

[0956] Therefore, there are characters described as "P $Y" (Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "P" means a pilot symbol, and "$Y" means performing a phase change to "phase change $Y".

[0957] In this case, 7 phase change cycles are performed in a modulated signal data symbol. For example, "a phase change of (2×0 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of (2×1 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of (2×2 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "a phase change of (2×3 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "a phase change of (2×4 x π )/7 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of (2×5 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of (2×6 x π)/7 radians is performed as phase $6 change". However, the phase change value is not limited to these values.

[0958] It should be noted that in the modulated signal #1 to be transmitted by the transmission station #1 (5701) and in the modulated signal #2 to be transmitted by the transmission station #2 (5702) in FIG. 57, a phase change may be performed on both of the modulated signal #1 and the modulated signal #2. However, different types of phase change can be performed on modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. It should be noted that the phase change values may be different, and the phase change cycle of the modulated signal #1 and the phase change cycle of the modulated signal #2 may be different. In addition, the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal #1 and may not be performed on the modulated signal #2. Then, the phase change may not be performed on the modulated signal #1, and the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal #2.

[0959] FIG. 60 illustrates a configuration example of a modulated signal (transmit signal) frame to be transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 58. In FIG. 60, the vertical axis indicates time and the horizontal axis indicates frequency. In FIG. 60, the symbols described as "P" are pilot symbols, and as features of the third case, a phase change is performed for the pilot symbols. In addition, the symbols described as "C" are control information symbols, and as features of the third case, phase change is performed for the control information symbols. It should be noted that FIG. 60 is an example in the case where the control information symbols are arranged in the direction of the frequency axis.

[0960] In the frame of FIG. 60, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any 7 types of phase change of "phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5, and phase change $6" are performed.

[0961] In the symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 6001 in FIG. 60, there is, for example, the symbol described as "#0 $0". In this case, "#0" means the "null character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$0" means to perform phase change for "phase change $0".

[0962] In addition, there is a symbol described as "#1 $1". In this case, "#1" means the "first character" of group #1 of data characters. Then "$1" means to perform a phase change for "phase change $1".

[0963] Therefore, there are characters described as "#X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "#X" means the "Xth character" of group #1 data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0964] In symbols of data symbol group #2 in region 6002 in FIG. 60, there is, for example, a character described as "%0 $2". In this case, "%0" means the "null character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$2" means to perform phase change for "phase change $2".

[0965] In addition, there is a character described as "%1 $1". In this case, "%1" means the "first character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$3" means to perform phase change for "phase change $3".

[0966] Therefore, there are characters described as "%X $Y" (X is an integer equal to or greater than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "%X" means the "Xth character" of group #2 of data characters. Then "$Y" means to perform a phase change for "$Y phase change".

[0967] In addition, in FIG. 60, there is a symbol described as "C $3", for example. In this case, "C" means a control information character, and "$0" means performing a phase change for "phase change $0".

[0968] Therefore, there are characters described as "C $Y" (Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "C" means a control information character, and "$Y" means performing a phase change for "phase change $Y".

[0969] In addition, in FIG. 59, there is a character described as "P $3", for example. In this case, "P" means a pilot symbol, and "$0" means performing a phase change for "phase change $0".

[0970] Therefore, there are symbols described as "P $Y" (Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, "P" means a pilot symbol, and "$Y" means performing a phase change to "phase change $Y".

[0971] In this case, 7 phase change cycles are performed in a modulated signal data symbol. For example, "a phase change of (2×0 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $0 phase change", "a phase change of (2×1 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $1 phase change", "a phase change of (2×2 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $2 phase change", "a phase change of (2×3 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $3 phase change", "a phase change of (2×4 x π )/7 radians is performed as a $4 phase change", "a phase change of (2×5 x π)/7 radians is performed as a $5 phase change", and "a phase change of (2×6 x π)/7 radians is performed as phase $6 change". However, the phase change value is not limited to these values.

[0972] It should be noted that in the modulated signal #1 to be transmitted by the transmission station #1 (5701) and in the modulated signal #2 to be transmitted by the transmission station #2 (5702) in FIG. 57, a phase change may be performed on both of the modulated signal #1 and the modulated signal #2. However, different types of phase change can be performed on modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. It should be noted that the phase change values may be different, and the phase change cycle of the modulated signal #1 and the phase change cycle of the modulated signal #2 may be different. In addition, the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal #1 and may not be performed on the modulated signal #1. Then, the phase change may not be performed on the modulated signal #1, and the phase change may be performed on the modulated signal #1.

[0973] FIG. 59 and 60 illustrate 7 phase change cycles as an example. However, the loop value is not limited to this example and may be another value. In addition, the phase change cycle may be formed in the direction of the frequency axis or in the direction of time.

[0974] In addition, when the phase change is performed for each symbol in FIG. 59 and 60, the phase change cycle may not occur.

[0975] It should be noted that the configuration of the transmitting stations #1 and #2 in FIG. 57 is not limited to the configuration in FIG. 58. Another configuration example will be described below with reference to FIG. 61.

[0976] Elements operating similarly to those shown in FIG. 58 are assigned identical reference numbers in FIG. 61 and they are not described. The features in Fig. 61 are such that the other device transmits data 5803, control information 5806, and transmission method instruction information 5811, and the receiving module 6102 in FIG. 61 performs demodulation and decoding to obtain data 5803, control information 5806, and transmission method instruction information 5811. Therefore, the receiving unit 6102 receives the modulated signal transmitted by the other device, receives the input of the received signal 6101, and demodulates and decodes the received signal 6101 so as to output data 5803, control information 5806, and transmission method instruction information 5811.

[0977] Indications of the third case are that "7 phase change cycles are performed in data symbol group #1 along with data symbol group #2 and symbols other than data symbols." Thus, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in the symbols of the whole frame. It should be noted that symbols other than data symbols are control information symbols and pilot symbols in the case of FIG. 59 and 60, but may be symbols other than control information symbols and pilot symbols.

[0978] For example, the transmitter (transmitter station) in FIG. 1 selects and executes any of the above described first case, second case, and third case. As expected, the transmitter in FIG. 1 performs the operations described with reference to FIG. 58 and 61 when the transmitter selects the third case.

[0979] As described above, the transmitter can preferably obtain a diversity effect in each group of data symbols by performing an appropriate phase change method in each transmission method. For this reason, the receiving device can obtain the effect of being able to obtain a good quality of data reception.

[0980] It should be noted that, as expected, the transmitting device (transmitting station) can only perform any of the above-described first case, second case, and third case.

[0981] Exemplary Embodiment A

Fig. 63 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and identical reference numbers are assigned to elements operating similarly to the elements in FIG. 2 and 34.

[0982] Preambles are transmitted from time t0 to time t1, symbol groups subjected to time division multiplexing (TDM) are transmitted from time t1 to time t2, and symbol groups subjected to frequency multiplexing - time division multiplexing (TFDM), are transmitted in the period from time t2 to time t3.

[0983] In the case of TDM, the number of symbols (or slots) included in each data symbol group #TDX is the number of symbols (or slots) in which data is placed corresponding to an integer multiple of a FEC block (having a code block length with error correction (code length for error correcting code)).

[0984] For example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each symbol of the data symbol group is 4, the number of symbols required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block, is 16200 characters. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols of data symbol group #TDX is 16200 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). It should be noted that the number of bits for transmitting each symbol is 4 when the single input, single output (SISO) and 16QAM methods are used.

[0985] In another example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each symbol of the data symbol group is 6, the number of symbols required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block errors is 10800 characters. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols of the data symbol group #TDX is 10800 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). Note that when the SISO method and 64QAM are used, the number of bits to transmit each symbol is 6.

[0986] In yet another example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each data symbol group slot is 8, the number of slots required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block is 8100. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of timeslots of the data symbol group #TDX is 8100 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). It should be noted that when the MIMO method is used, the modulation method for stream 1 is 16QAM, and the modulation method for stream 2 is 16QAM, the number of bits to transmit each slot, which includes one symbol of stream 1 and one symbol of stream 2 , equals 8.

[0987] Of the symbol groups subjected to time division channels in the period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 63, data symbol group #TD1, data symbol group #TD2, data symbol group #TD3, data symbol group #TD4, and data symbol group #TD5 satisfy that the number of symbols (slots) included in the data symbol group is a number symbols (slots) in which data corresponding to an integer multiple of an FEC block (having an error correction code block length (code length for an error correction code)) is placed, as described above. Symbol groups are arranged in the direction of the time axis.

[0988] FIG. 63, the number of carriers along the frequency axis is 64. Accordingly, carriers from carrier 1 to carrier 64 are present.

[0989] For example, with respect to the data symbol group #TD1, the data symbol arrangement starts from "time $1, carrier 1", and then the data symbols are arranged at "time $1, carrier 2", "time $1, carrier 3", "time $1 , carrier 4",..., "time $1, carrier 63", "time $1, carrier 64", "time $2, carrier 1", "time $2, carrier 2", "time $2, carrier 3", " time $2, carrier 4",..., "time $2, carrier 63", "time $2, carrier 64", "time $3, carrier 1", etc.

[0990] Regarding the data symbol group #TD3, the data symbol arrangement starts from "time $6000 carrier 1", and then the data symbols are arranged at "time $6000 carrier 2", "time $6000 carrier 3", "time $6000 carrier 4",..., "time $6000 carrier 63", "time $6000 carrier 64", "time $6001 carrier 1", "time $6001 carrier 2", "time $6001 carrier 3", "time $6001 , carrier 4",..., "time $6001, carrier 63", "time $6001, carrier 64", "time $6002, carrier 1", etc. and the character arrangement is completed when the character is assembled at "time $7000, carrier 20".

[0991] Then, with respect to the data symbol group #TD4, the data symbol arrangement starts from "time $7000, carrier 21".

[0992] In addition, data symbols in data symbol groups #TD4 and TD#5 are arranged according to the same rule, and the last symbol of data symbol group #TD5, which is the last data symbol group, is arranged at time $10,000 on carrier 32.

[0993] The dummy symbols are then assembled on carriers from carrier 33 to carrier 64 at time $10,000. Accordingly, symbols on carriers 1-64 must also be transmitted at time $10,000. It should be noted that each of the dummy symbols has a specific value for the in-phase I component and also a specific value for the quadrature Q component.

[0994] For example, the in-phase I component of the dummy symbol may be generated using a pseudo-random sequence that includes "0" and "1", and the quadrature component Q of the dummy symbol may be equal to 0. In this case, the pseudo-random sequence is initialized at the position of the first dummy symbol, and the in-phase component I can be converted to one of the values +1 and -1, based on the in-phase component I=2 (1/2 is a pseudo-random sequence).

[0995] Alternatively, the quadrature component Q of the dummy symbol may be generated using a pseudo-random sequence that includes "0" and "1", and the quadrature component I of the dummy symbol may be equal to 0. In this case, the pseudo-random sequence is initialized at the position of the first dummy symbol, and the quadrature component Q can be converted to one of the values +1 and -1, based on the quadrature component Q=2 (1/2 is a pseudo-random sequence).

[0996] In addition, the in-phase component of the dummy symbol may be set to a non-zero real number, and the quadrature component of the dummy symbol may be set to a non-zero real number.

[0997] The method for generating a dummy symbol is not limited to the above. The description regarding the dummy character here is also applicable to the dummy characters described below.

[0998] According to the above rule, dummy symbols are arranged in a time section (from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 63) in which time division is performed.

[0999] A Time Frequency Division Multiplexing (TFDM) method will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

[1000] The period from time t2 to time t3 in FIG. 63 shows an example of a frame configuration in which time-frequency division multiplexing is performed.

[1001] At time $10001, the data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) and the data symbol #TFD2 (3402) are subjected to frequency division multiplexing, and the data symbol group #TFD2 (3402), the data symbol group #TFD3 (3403) and the #TFD6 (3406) of the data symbols are time division multiplexed on the carrier 11. Accordingly, the period from time t2 to time t3 includes a part for which frequency division is performed and a part for which time division multiplexing is performed, and because of this, the method is called "time-frequency division multiplexing", here.

[1002] Data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) is present at times $10001-$14000, i is greater than or equal to 10001 and less than or equal to 14000, and data symbols are present on carriers 1-10 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1003] Data symbol group #TFD2 (3402) is present at times $10001-$11000, i is greater than or equal to 10001 and less than or equal to 11000, and data symbols are present on carriers 11-64 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1004] Data symbol group #TFD3 (3403) is present at times $11001-$13000, i is greater than or equal to 11001 and less than or equal to 13000, and data symbols are present on carriers 11-35 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1005] Data symbol group #TFD4 (3404) is present at times $11001-$12000, i is greater than or equal to 11001 and less than or equal to 12000, and data symbols are present on carriers 36-64 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1006] Data symbol group #TFD5 (3405) is present at times $12001-$13000, i is greater than or equal to 12001 and less than or equal to 13000, and data symbols are present on carriers 36-64 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1007] Data symbol group #TFD6 (3406) is present at times $13001-$14000, i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, and data symbols are present on carriers 11-30 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1008] Data symbol group #TFD7 (3407) is present at times $13001-$14000, i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, and a data symbol is present on carriers 31-50 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1009] Data symbol group #TFD8 (3408) is present at times $13001-$14000, i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, and data symbols are present on carriers 51-64 at time i, which satisfies the above.

[1010] The time-frequency division multiplexing method has the feature that the carrier number of the occupied carrier is the same for the data symbol group in all time slices in which the data symbols of the data symbol group are present.

[1011] The number of symbols (or the number of slots) included in the data symbol group #TFDX is U. U is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

[1012] First, "V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1)" is provided, which indicates the number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data having an integer multiple of the error correction code block length (code length for error-correcting code)". Note that U-α+1≤V≤U must be satisfied (α denotes the number of symbols (or number of slots) needed to transmit a block having a block length (code length) of the error correction code (unit: bits ), and is an integer greater than or equal to 1).

[1013] When U-V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U-V symbols (or U-V slots) are added. Thus, the #TFDX data symbol group includes data symbols that make up V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols that make up U-V symbols (or U-V slots) (each dummy symbol has a specific value for the in-phase component I and also a certain value for the quadrature component Q).

[1014] All groups of data symbols subjected to time-frequency division multiplexing satisfy that "a data symbol group includes data symbols that make up V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols that make up U-V symbols (or U-V time slices)".

[1015] In particular, when the time-frequency division multiplexed data symbol groups are to have dummy symbols (or dummy slots), the dummy symbols (dummy slots) are inserted into the data symbol groups separately.

[1016] FIG. 64 illustrates an example of a state in which dummy symbols (or dummy slots) are inserted into, for example, data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) in FIG. 63.

[1017] In the data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), the data symbols are arranged preferentially from the position having the smaller time index. A rule is adopted that if data symbols are arranged on all occupied carriers at a certain time, data symbols are assembled on carriers at a time after a certain time.

[1018] For example, with respect to the data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), the data symbol is assembled on carrier 1 at time $10001, and thereafter, data symbols are assembled on carrier 2 at time $10001, carrier 3 at time $10001,..., carrier 9 at time $10001 and carrier 10 at time $10001, as illustrated in FIG. 64. Then moving on to time $10002, data symbols are assembled on carrier 1 at time $10002, carrier 2 at time $10002, and so on.

[1019] Regarding the data symbol arrangement at time $13995, data symbols are arranged on carrier 1 at time $13995, carrier 2 at time $13995, carrier 3 at time $13995, carrier 4 at time $13995, carrier 5 at time $13995, and carrier 6 at time $13995 . This completes the layout of the data symbols.

[1020] However, there are symbols as data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) on carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time $13995, on carriers 1-10 at time $13996, on carriers 1-10 at time $13,997, on carriers 1-10 at $13,998, on carriers 1-10 at $13,999, and on carriers 1-10 10 at $14,000. Thus, dummy symbols are assembled on carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9 and carrier 10 at time $13995, on carriers 1-10 at time $13996, on carriers 1-10 at time $13997, on carriers 1-10 at time $13998, at carriers 1-10 at $13,999 and carriers 1-10 10 at $14,000.

[1021] According to the identical method as described above, the dummy symbols are arranged, if necessary, also in the data symbol group #TFD2 (3402), the data symbol group #TFD3 (3403), the data symbol group #TFD4 (3404), the data symbol group #TFD5 (3405 ) data symbols, data symbol group #TFD6 (3406), data symbol group #TFD7 (3407), and data symbol group #TFD8 (3408) in FIG. 63.

[1022] As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methods for a time division multiplexed frame and a time division multiplexed frame, and thus, the receiver can easily sort the data symbols and demodulate and decode data. In addition, the advantage of preventing data rate drop due to dummy symbols can be achieved.

[1023] It should be noted that the frame configuration in which "preambles", "time division symbols", and "time frequency division symbols" are arranged in this order along the time axis is described based on an example in fig. 63, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, a frame configuration in which "preambles", "time-frequency division symbols", and "time division symbols" are arranged in this order may be adapted, and may also include symbols other than symbols illustrated in FIG. 63.

[1024] For example, in FIG. 63, "preambles" may be inserted between the "time division symbols" and "time frequency division symbols", or other symbols may be inserted between the "time division symbols" and "frequency division symbols". - time division of channels".

[1025] FIG. 65 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in which the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and identical reference numbers are assigned to elements operating similarly to the elements in FIG. 2 and 34.

[1026] Preambles are transmitted from time t0 to time t1, symbol groups subjected to frequency division multiplexing (FDM) are transmitted from time t1 to time t2, and symbol groups subjected to frequency division multiplexing - time division multiplexing (TFDM), are transmitted in the period from time t2 to time t3.

[1027] In the case of FDM, the number of symbols (or the number of slots) included in each data symbol group #FDX is the number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data corresponding to an integer multiple of a FEC block (having a code block length error-correcting code or code length for error-correcting code).

[1028] For example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each symbol of the data symbol group is 4, the number of symbols required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block, is 16200 characters. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of characters included in the data character group #FDX is 16200 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). It should be noted that when the single input single output (SISO) method and 16QAM are used, the number of bits to transmit each symbol is 4.

[1029] In another example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each symbol of the data symbol group is 6, the number of symbols required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block of errors is 10800. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of characters for the data character group #FDX is 10800 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). Note that when the SISO method and 64QAM are used, the number of bits to transmit each symbol is 6.

[1030] In yet another example, when the length of the error correction code block is 64800 bits, and the number of bits to transmit each data symbol group slot is 8, the number of slots required to transmit 64800 bits, which indicate the length of the error correction code block is 8100. Thus, in such a case, the number of timeslots of the data symbol group #FDX is 8100 x N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). It should be noted that when the MIMO method is used and the modulation method for stream 1 is 16QAM while the modulation method for stream 2 is 16QAM, the number of bits to transmit each slot, which includes one symbol of stream 1 and one symbol thread 2 is 8.

[1031] In the period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 65, the number of symbols (or the number of timeslices) in each of the data symbol group #FD1, the data symbol group #FD2, the data symbol group #FD3, and the frequency division data symbol group #FD4 satisfies the "number of symbols (or number of time slots)". quants) into which data corresponding to an integer multiple of an FEC block (having an error correction code block length or a code length for an error correction code) is placed" as described above. Symbol groups are arranged along the frequency axis.

[1032] FIG. 65, the number of carriers along the frequency axis is 64. Accordingly, carriers 1 to 64 are present.

[1033] For example, data symbol group #FD1 includes data symbols on carriers 1-15 from time $1 to time $10,000.

[1034] Data symbol group #FD2 includes data symbols on carriers 16-29 from time $1 to time $10000 and data symbols on carrier 30 from time $1 to time $6000.

[1035] Data symbol group #FD3 includes data symbols on carrier 30 from time $6001 to time $10000, data symbols on carriers 31-44 from time $1 to time 10000, and data symbols on carrier 45 from time $1 to time $7000.

[1036] Data symbol group #FD4 includes data symbols on carrier 45 from time $7001 to time $10000, data symbols on carriers 46-63 from time $1 to time $10000, and data symbols on carrier 64 from time $1 to time $6000.

[1037] The last data symbol group of the data symbol groups arranged along the frequency axis is data symbol group #4, and the last symbol is on carrier 64 at time $6000.

[1038] Then, dummy symbol assembly starts at time $6001 on carrier 64. Thus, dummy symbols are arranged on carrier 64 from time $6001 to time $10000. It should be noted that each dummy symbol has a specific value for the in-phase I component and also has a specific value for the quadrature Q component.

[1039] According to the above rule, dummy symbols are arranged, for example, in a section subjected to frequency division from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 65.

[1040] As described above, the data symbols are extracted preferably from the position having the lower frequency index, but the data symbols are preferentially arranged from the position having the lower temporal index. This aspect must be described.

[1041] In the data symbol group #FD1 (6501), the data symbols are preferably arranged from the position having the smaller time index. A rule is adopted such that if data symbols are arranged on all occupied carriers at a certain time, data symbols are assembled on carriers at a time after a certain time.

[1042] For example, in data symbol group #FD1 (6501), as illustrated in FIG. 65, a data symbol is arranged on carrier 1 at time $1, and thereafter, data symbols are arranged on carrier 2 at time $1, carrier 3 at time $1,..., carrier 14 at time $1, and carrier 15 at time $1. Then, moving to time $2, data symbols are arranged on carrier 1 at time $2, carrier 2 at time $2, carrier 3 at time $2, ..., carrier 14 at time $2, and carrier 15 at time $2.

[1043] Thereafter, data symbols are also arranged at time $3 identically, and data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 identically.

[1044] In data symbol group #FD2 (6502), as illustrated in FIG. 65, a data symbol is arranged on carrier 16 at time $1, and thereafter data symbols are arranged on carrier 17 at time $1, carrier 18 at time $1, ..., carrier 29 at time $1, and carrier 30 at time $1. Then, moving to time $2, data symbols are arranged on carrier 17 at time $2, carrier 18 at time $2, carrier 19 at time $2, ..., carrier 29 at time $2, and carrier 30 at time $2. Thereafter, data symbols are also arranged at time $3 identically, and data symbols are arranged up to time $6000 identically.

[1045] A data symbol is assembled on carrier 16 at time $6001, and thereafter data symbols are assembled on carrier 17 at time $6001, carrier 18 at time $6001, ..., carrier 28 at time $6001, and carrier 29 at time $6001. Then, moving to time $6002, data symbols are arranged on carrier 17 at time $6002, carrier 18 at time $6002, carrier 19 at time $6002, ..., carrier 28 at time $6002, and carrier 29 at time $6002. Thereafter, data symbols are also arranged at time $6003 identically, and data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 identically.

[1046] In data symbol group #FD3 (6503), as illustrated in FIG. 65, a data symbol is arranged on carrier 31 at time $1, and thereafter data symbols are assembled on carrier 32 at time $1, carrier 33 at time $1,..., carrier 44 at time $1, and carrier 45 at time $1. Moving on to time $2, data symbols are arranged on carrier 31 at time $2, carrier 32 at time $2, carrier 33 at time $2, ..., carrier 44 at time $2, and carrier 45 at time $2. Thereafter, data symbols are also arranged at time $3 identically, and data symbols are arranged up to time $6000 identically.

[1047] A data symbol is assembled on carrier 30 at time $6001, and thereafter data symbols are assembled on carrier 31 at time $6001, carrier 32 at time $6001,..., carrier 44 at time $6001, and carrier 45 at time $6001. Then, moving to time $6002, data symbols are assembled on carrier 31 at time $6002, carrier 32 at time $6002, carrier 33 at time $6002, ..., carrier 44 at time $6002, and carrier 45 at time $6002. Data symbols are also arranged at time $6003 identically, and data symbols are arranged up to time $7000 identically.

[1048] The data symbol is then assembled on carrier 30 at time $7001, and thereafter, the data symbols are assembled on carrier 31 at time $7001, carrier 32 at time $7001, ..., carrier 43 at time $7001, and carrier 44 at time $7001. Then, moving to time $7002, data symbols are assembled on carrier 30 at time $7002, carrier 31 at time $7002, carrier 32 at time $7002, ..., carrier 43 at time $6002, and carrier 44 at time $6002. Thereafter, data symbols are also arranged at time $7003 identically, and thereafter data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 identically.

[1049] The data symbols are also arranged for the data symbol group #FD4 (6504) identically.

[1050] It should be noted that the arrangement described herein means a "method of arranging generated data symbols in order" or "a method of rearranging generated data symbols and arranging rearranged data symbols in order".

[1051] Arranging the data symbols in this way provides the receiver with the advantage that less storage capacity is used to store the data symbols. If the data symbols are arranged in the frequency direction, it may be difficult to start the next processing until the data symbols are received at time $10,000.

[1052] Data symbol groups #TFDX (3401-3408) in FIG. 65 operate similarly to the data symbol groups of FIG. 64, and therefore their description is omitted.

[1053] As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methods for the frame subjected to frequency division multiplexing and the frame subjected to frequency division multiplexing, whereby the receiving device can easily sort the data symbols and demodulate and decode data. In addition, the advantage of preventing data rate drop due to dummy symbols can be achieved.

[1054] It should be noted that the frame configuration in which "preambles", "frequency division symbols", and "time frequency division symbols" are arranged in order along the time axis is described based on the example in FIG. 65, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto, and, for example, a frame configuration in which "preambles", "time-frequency division symbols", and "frequency division division symbols" can be arranged in order .

[1055] The frame configuration may also include symbols other than the symbols illustrated in FIG. 65. As an example, a method for including "preambles", "frequency division multiplexed symbols", "time frequency division multiplexed symbols", and "time division multiplexed symbols" in a frame configuration is described.

[1056] For example, in FIG. 65, "preambles" may be inserted between "frequency division symbols" and "frequency division symbols", and other symbols may be inserted between "frequency division symbols" and "frequency division symbols". - time division of channels".

[1057] FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in which the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and identical reference numbers are assigned to elements operating similarly to the elements in FIG. 2.

[1058] Time division symbols 6601 are transmitted in sections from time t1 to t2. It should be noted that an example of the configuration of symbols subjected to time division is as illustrated in FIG. 63 and the time division symbols 6601 include, for example, data symbol group #TD1 (6301), data symbol group #TD2 (6302), data symbol group #TD3 (6303), data symbol group #TD4 ( 6304), data symbol group #TD5 (6305), and dummy symbols 6306.

[1059] In the section from time t2 to time t3, frequency division multiplexed symbols 6602 are transmitted. It should be noted that an example of the configuration of symbols subjected to frequency division is as illustrated in FIG. 65 and the frequency division symbols 6602 include, for example, data symbol group #FD1 (6501), data symbol group #FD2 (6502), data symbol group #FD3 (6503), data symbol group #FD4 (6504) data characters and dummy characters (6505).

[1060] In the section from time t3 to time t4, symbols 6603 subjected to time-frequency division of channels are transmitted. It should be noted that an example of the symbol configuration subjected to time-frequency division is as illustrated in FIG. 63 and 65, and the symbols 6703 subjected to time-frequency division include, for example, data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), data symbol group #TFD2 (3402), data symbol group #TFD3 (3403), group # TFD4 (3404) data symbols, group #TFD5 (3405) data symbols, group #TFD6 (3406) data symbols, group #TFD7 (3407) data symbols, and group #TFD8 (3408) data symbols.

[1061] At this time, the method of inserting dummy symbols into the time division symbols 6601 is identical to the method described above, the method of inserting dummy symbols into the frequency division symbols 6602 is also identical to the method described above, and the method inserting dummy symbols into time-frequency divided symbols 6603 is also identical to the method described above.

[1062] As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methods for a time division multiplexed frame, a frequency division multiplexed frame, and a time division multiplexed frame, whereby the receiver can easily sort the symbols of the data; and demodulate and decode the data. In addition, the advantage of preventing drop in data rate due to dummy symbols can be achieved.

[1063] It should be noted that the frame configuration in which the "preambles", "time division symbols", "frequency division symbols", and "time frequency division symbols" are arranged in order along the time division axis, will be described based on the example of FIG. 66, but the present disclosure is not limited to this, and, for example, "time division symbols", "frequency division symbols", and "time frequency division symbols" may be transmitted in any (time ) order after the "preambles". The frame configuration may also include symbols other than the symbols illustrated in FIG. 66.

[1064] For example, in FIG. 66, "preambles" may be inserted between "time division symbols" and "frequency division symbols", and other symbols may be inserted between "time division symbols" and "frequency division symbols" . In addition, "preambles" may be inserted between "frequency division symbols" and "time-frequency division symbols", and other symbols may be inserted between "frequency division division symbols" and "time-frequency division symbols". frequency-time division of channels".

[1065] It should be noted that the present disclosure can be achieved even by partially combining and performing the present disclosure.

[1066] Exemplary Embodiment B

Frame configuration

The following describes a configuration example of a transmission frame in the present exemplary embodiment with reference to FIG. 67. In FIG. 67, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency. Identical references with numbers are assigned to elements operating similarly to the elements in FIG. 2. FIG. 67 illustrates an example in which ten multiplex frames from multiplex frame #MF1 (6701) to multiplex frame #MF10 (6710) are included in a transmission frame. Multiplex frames occupy areas that do not overlap in a transmission frame. In the example in FIG. 67, multiplex frame #MF1 (6701) occupies the area from carrier 1 to carrier 2000 from time $1 to time $60, multiplex frame #MF2 (6702) occupies the area from carrier 1 to carrier 2000 from time $61 to time $100, multiplex frames #MF3 (6703) occupy the area from carrier 1 to carrier 2000 from time $101 at time $160, multiplex frame #MF4 (6704) occupies the area from carrier 1 to carrier 600 from time $161 to time $360, multiplex frame #MF5 (6705) covers the area from carrier 601 to carrier 1000 from time $161 to time $260, multiplex frame #MF6 (6706) occupies the area from carrier 601 to carrier 1000 from time $261 to time $360, multiplex frame #MF7 (6707) occupies the area from carrier 1001 to carrier 1600 from time $161 to time $360, multiplex frame #MF8 (6708) occupies the area from carrier 1601 to carrier 2000 from time $161 to time $400, multiplex frame #MF9 (6709) occupies the area from carrier 1 to carrier 800 from time $361 to time $400, and multiplex frame #MF10 (6710) occupies the area from carrier 801 to carrier 1600 from time $361 to time $400.

[1067] Multiplex Frame Designation

The multiplex frame configuration is denoted, for example, as follows. An example of an indication module that indicates the multiplex frame configuration is illustrated in FIG. 68. The number of multiplex frames is indicated by numMuxFrames. First, denoted by numMuxFrames. Then, information on the multiplex frame is repeatedly indicated for the counter indicated by numMuxFrames. The information regarding each multiplex frame includes information indicating the region of the multiplex frame and muxFrameType, which is information indicating the type of the multiplex frame. The information indicating the area of the multiplex frame may include, for example, startTime, which is the time when the multiplex frame starts, startCarrier, which is the carrier on which the multiplex frame starts, endTime, which is the time at which the multiplex frame ends, and endCarrier, which is the carrier on which the multiplex frame ends. The information regarding each multiplex frame may include, etc., which is information regarding the multiplex frame other than the above.

[1068] Multiplex Frame Type

The field labeled muxFrameType, which indicates the type of the multiplex frame, is, for example, a field for designating the configuration or use of the multiplex frame, such as time division multiplexing (TDM) and frequency division multiplexing (FDM). Values of a field labeled muxFrameType indicating the type of multiplex frame may include additional values to enable future extension, and may also indicate configuration and usage other than TDM or FDM.

[1069] Last Carrier Designation

A symbol that is not used for data transmission, such as a pilot symbol, is multiplexed into a transmission frame, and thus the number of carriers that can be used to transmit data symbols may vary with time. Although FIG. 68 illustrates an example where carrier 2000 is at the last end but, for example, even if carrier 2000 is at the last end at time $1, carrier 1998 is at the last end at time $2, and carrier 2003 is at the last end at time $2. $3. Accordingly, a problem arises when an area of a multiplex frame is designated that includes a carrier near the last end.

[1070] The carrier at the last end at the time when the number of carriers that can be used to transmit data symbols is the smallest in the multiplex frame that includes the carrier near the last end may be indicated in the field labeled endCarrier for multiplex frame. In this case, a rectangular multiplex frame may be configured. However, in this case, there are unused carriers while there are many carriers that can be used to transmit data symbols. An unused carrier that is not used to transmit a data symbol is used, for example, to transmit a dummy symbol.

[1071] The last end at the time when the number of carriers that can be used to transmit data symbols is the largest in the multiplex frame, which includes the carrier near the last end, may be indicated in the field labeled endCarrier for the multiplex. frame. In this case, the number of carriers used for transmitting data symbols varies for each time, according to the carrier at the last end that can be used for transmitting a data symbol.

[1072] A special value that indicates the position of the carrier at the last end that can be used to transmit a data symbol is predefined for each time, and a special value can be set in a field labeled endCarrier that indicates the carrier on which the multiplex terminates. frame. The special value can be the maximum value that can be specified in the field labeled endCarrier. By setting such a special value in the field labeled endCarrier, which indicates the carrier on which the multiplex frame is terminated, it is not necessary to identify in advance the carrier at the last end at the time when the number of carriers that can be used to transmit data symbols is the largest. in the multiplex frame.

[1073] Examples of values designated in the multiplex frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 68 are shown below, based on the example illustrated in FIG. 67. The number of multiplex frames is 10, and hence numMuxFrames is 10. Here, with respect to the i-th multiplex frame #MFi, the time at which the frame starts is expressed by startTime[i], the carrier at which the frame starts is expressed by startCarrier[i], the time at which the frame ends is expressed by endTime[i], and the multiplex frame type is expressed by muxFrameType[i]. In multiplex frame example #MF1, startTime[1] is time $1, startCarrier[1] is carrier 1, endTime[1] is time $60, and endCarrier[1] is carrier 2000. In multiplex frame example #MF5, startTime[5 ] is time $161, startCarrier[5] is carrier 601, endTime[5] is time $260, and endCarrier[5] is carrier 1000.

[1074] FIG. 69 illustrates an example in which a group of data symbols is multiplexed into the multiplex frame #MF1 (6701) in FIG. 67. Multiplex frame type #MF1 (6701) is a time division multiplexed (TDM) frame. TDM is designated in muxFrameType[1]. In the example in FIG. 69, three data symbol groups from data symbol group #DS1(6901) to data symbol group #DS3(6903) are subjected to TDM. Data symbol group #DS1(6901), data symbol group #DS2 (6902), data symbol group #DS3 (6903) are sequentially multiplexed into multiplex frame #MF1 (6701), and if there are remaining symbols, a dummy symbol group (6904) is inserted .

[1075] The information regarding the arrangement of the data symbol group is indicated, for example, by the number of the multiplex frame into which the data symbol group is multiplexed and the area in the multiplex frame. An area in a multiplex frame, for example, is expressed by a start position and an end position of the area in which a group of data symbols is multiplexed. When the data symbol groups are multiplexed from the leading end of the multiplex frame, without space, the starting positions of the areas in which the data symbol groups are multiplexed are known, and therefore only the end positions of the areas in which the data symbol groups are multiplexed can be designated. Starting and ending positions of areas in which data symbol groups are multiplexed may be designated using time positions and carrier positions in the transmission frame, or may be designated using relative time positions and relative carrier positions in the multiplex frame.

[1076] An example is described in which three data symbol groups are multiplexed into the multiplex frame #MF1 (6701), but the number of data symbol groups to be multiplexed into the multiplex frame is not limited to three, and instead, the data symbol groups may not be used at all. multiplexed.

[1077] As described above, by efficiently multiplexing a plurality of data symbol groups into one multiplex frame, the number of symbols in a dummy symbol group can be reduced and transmission efficiency can be improved.

[1078] FIG. 70 illustrates an example in which groups of data symbols are multiplexed into multiplex frame #MF3 (6703) in FIG. 67. Multiplex frame type #MF3 (6703) is a frame subjected to frequency division multiplexing (FDM). FDM is designated in muxFrameType[3].

[1079] In the example of FIG. 70, three data symbol groups, namely, data symbol group #DS6 (7001) through data symbol group #DS8 (7003), are subjected to frequency division multiplexing. Data symbol group #DS6 (7001), data symbol group #DS7 (7002), and data symbol group #DS8 (7003) are sequentially multiplexed into multiplex frame #MF3 (6703), and if there are remaining symbols, a dummy symbol group (7004) is inserted .

[1080] The information regarding the arrangement of the data symbol group is indicated, for example, by the number of the multiplex frame into which the data symbol group is multiplexed and the area in the multiplex frame. An area in a multiplex frame, for example, is expressed by a start position and an end position of the area in which a group of data symbols is multiplexed. When the data symbol groups are multiplexed from the leading end of the multiplex frame, without space, the starting positions of the areas in which the data symbol groups are multiplexed are known, and therefore only the end positions of the areas in which the data symbol groups are multiplexed can be designated. Starting and ending positions of areas in which data symbol groups are multiplexed may be designated using time positions and carrier positions in the transmission frame, or may be designated using relative time positions and relative carrier positions in the multiplex frame.

[1081] An example is described in which three data symbol groups are multiplexed into the multiplex frame #MF3 (6703), but the number of data symbol groups to be multiplexed into the multiplex frame is not limited to three, and instead, the data symbol groups may not be used at all. multiplexed.

[1082] As described above, by efficiently multiplexing a plurality of data symbol groups into one multiplex frame, the number of symbols in a dummy symbol group can be reduced and transmission efficiency can be improved.

[1083] Data Character Group Designation

The information regarding the data character group is indicated, for example, as follows. Fig. 71 illustrates an example of an indication unit regarding a group of data symbols. The number of data symbol groups is specified by numDataSymbolGroups. First, denoted by numDataSymbolGroups. Then, the information on the data symbol group is repeatedly indicated for the counter indicated by numDataSymbolGroups. The information regarding each data symbol group includes muxFrameIndex indicating the multiplex frame number in which the data symbol group is arranged, and information indicating the area in which the data symbol group is arranged. The information indicating the area in which the data character group is arranged includes, for example, endTimeOffset indicating the time at which the data character group area ends, and endCarrierOffset indicating the carrier at which the data character group area ends. The information indicating the region in which the data symbol group is arranged may further include, for example, startTimeOffset indicating the time at which the data symbol group region begins, and startCarrierOffset indicating the carrier on which the data symbol group region begins. Additionally, startTimeOffset indicating the time at which the data character group region begins, startCarrierOffset indicating the carrier on which the data character group region begins, endTimeOffset indicating the time at which the data character group region ends, and endCarrierOffset indicating the carrier on which the data character group region begins. groups of data symbols may be indicated using time positions and carrier positions in the transmission frame, or may be indicated using relative time positions and relative carrier positions in the multiplex frame. The information regarding the data symbol group may include etc. indicating information regarding the data symbols other than the above.

[1084] Hierarchical Structure

In the present exemplary embodiment, the transmission frame can be flexibly configured by configuring a multiplex frame and arranging groups of data symbols into a hierarchy. In addition, the designation with respect to the multiplex frame configuration and the designation with respect to a group of data symbols are simplified, thereby reducing the amount of information required for such designations and improving transmission efficiency.

[1085] In addition, the number of dummy symbols can be reduced and transmission efficiency can be improved by multiplexing a plurality of data symbol groups into a multiplex frame.

[1086] Additional note 1

The broadcast system (or communication system) according to the present disclosure is described according to the exemplary embodiments described above. However, the present disclosure is not limited to the exemplary embodiments described above.

[1087] As would be expected, the present disclosure may be performed by combining a variety of exemplary embodiments and other content described herein.

[1088] In addition, each exemplary embodiment and other content are examples only. For example, although the "modulation method, error correction coding method (error correction code, code length, coding rate, etc. to be used), control information, etc." are roughly illustrated, it is possible to perform the present disclosure with identical configuration even when other types of "modulation method, error correction coding method (error correction code, code length, coding rate, etc. to be used), control information, and the like" are applied.

[1089] As for the modulation method, even when a modulation method other than the modulation methods described herein is used, the exemplary embodiments and other content described herein can be performed. For example, APSK (amplitude phase shift keying) (for example, 16APSK, 64APSK, 128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK and 4096APSK), PAM (pulse amplitude modulation) (for example, 4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM, 64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM) can be used. , 1024PAM and 4096PAM), PSK (Phase Shift Keying) (for example, BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16PSK, 64PSK, 128PSK, 256PSK, 1024PSK and 4096PSK) and QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) (for example, 4QAM, 8QAM, 16QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 1024QAM and 4096QAM), or in each modulation method, universal mapping or non-uniform mapping (any mapping can be performed) can be performed.

[1090] In addition, a method for arranging 16 signal points, 64 signal points, and the like. on the I-Q plane (modulation method having 16 signal points, 64 signal points, and the like) is not limited to the signal point arrangement method of the modulation methods described herein. Therefore, the function of outputting the in-phase component and the quadrature component based on a plurality of bits is a function in the mapping module.

[1091] In addition, in this document, when there is a complex plane, the phase unit, for example, argument, is "radians".

[1092] When the complex plane is used, the display in polar form may be performed as a display by the polar coordinates of the complex number. When a point (a, b) in the complex plane is associated with a complex number z=+jb (a and b are actual numbers and j is the unit of the imaginary number), and when that point is expressed by [r, θ] in polar coordinates, a =r x cosθ, and b=r x sinθ:

[1093] Equation 61

[1094] are satisfied, r is the absolute value of z (r=|z|), and θ is the argument. Then z=+jb is expressed by rxe ^jθ .

[1095] The present disclosure described herein is applicable to a multi-carrier transmission method such as an OFDM method, and is also applicable to a single carrier transmission method. For example, in the case of the multi-carrier method, the symbols are arranged on the frequency axis, but in the case of a single carrier, the symbols are arranged only in the time direction. In addition, the spread spectrum communication method is also applicable to baseband signals through the use of spreading codes.

[1096] Various modulation techniques may be used for the data chunks s0, s1, s2, and s3 in the above-described exemplary embodiments, respectively.

[1097] In this document, the terminal receiver and the antenna may be configured separately. For example, the receiver includes an interface that receives, via a cable, input of a signal received at the antenna or a signal obtained by performing frequency conversion on the signal received at the antenna, and the receiver performs post-processing. In addition, the data and information received by the receiving device is then converted into video or audio, and the display (monitor) displays the video or the speaker outputs the audio. Additionally, data and information received by the receiver may be subject to video or audio related signal processing (signal processing may not be performed), and may be output from an RCA terminal (video terminal or audio terminal), USB (Universal Serial Bus), USB 2, USB 3, HDMI (registered trademark) (high-definition multimedia interface), HDMI (registered trademark) 2, digital terminal, etc. receiving device. In addition, data and information received by the receiver are modulated by using a wireless communication method (Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (iEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11 ad, etc.), WiGiG, Bluetooth (registered trademark), etc.) or wired communication method (optical communication, power line communication, etc.), and these pieces of information can be transmitted to other devices . In this case, the terminal includes a transmitter for transmitting information. In this case, the terminal may transmit data including data and information received by the receiver, or may generate modified data from the data and information received by the receiver and transmit the modified data.

[1098] As used herein, communication or broadcast devices such as a broadcast station, base station, access point, terminal, and mobile phone can be considered to include a transmitter. In this case, a communication device such as a television set, a radio station, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, and a base station can be considered to include a receiver. In addition, each of the transmitter and receiver according to the present disclosure can also be considered to be a device having communication functions, and is in the form of being able to connect through any interface with a device for executing an application, such as a television receiver, a radio station, a personal computer. and mobile phone.

[1099] In addition, in the present exemplary embodiment, symbols other than data symbols, such as pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, postambles, reference symbols, etc.) and control information symbols, may be arranged in frames in any manner. In such a case, these symbols are referred to here as "pilot symbol" and "control information symbol", but may be named in any way, and the function itself is important.

[1100] As a result, for example, the symbol is called "preamble" in this document, but the name of the symbol is not limited to this name, and another name can be given to the symbol, for example, "control information symbol" and "control channel". This symbol is a symbol for transmitting control information such as transmission method information, examples of which include, for example, a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction code coding rate, a code length for an error correction code, a frame configuration method, and a method ( size) Fourier transform.

[1101] In addition, the pilot symbol must be only a known symbol modulated by using PSK modulation in the transmitter and receiver, or the receiver may be able to recognize the symbol transmitted by the transmitter by establishing synchronization. The receiver performs frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel (each modulated signal) estimation (CSI (Channel State Information) estimation), signal detection, and the like. through the use of this symbol.

[1102] In addition, the control information symbol is a symbol for transmitting information that is used to implement communication other than data communication (eg, application communication) and to be transmitted to the communication side, and examples of the information include a method modulation used for communication, the error correction coding method, the coding rate of the error correction coding method, and the upper layer setting information.

[1103] In the frame configurations herein, another symbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol and a null symbol (symbol in-phase component is 0 (zero) and quadrature component is 0 (zero)) may be inserted in the first preamble. Similarly, a symbol such as a pilot symbol and a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)) may be inserted in the second preamble. In addition, the preamble is configured with a first preamble and a second preamble. However, the preamble configuration is not limited to this configuration. The preamble may be configured with only the first preamble (first preamble group) or may be configured with two or more preambles (preamble groups). It should be noted that with respect to the preamble configuration, the same also applies to the frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments.

[1104] In addition, the group of data symbols is indicated in the frame configurations in this document. However, another symbol may be inserted, examples of which include a pilot symbol, a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)), and the control information symbol). It should be noted that in this regard, the same also applies to frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments. Then, another symbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol, a null symbol (the in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component is 0 (zero)), a control information symbol, and a data symbol, may be inserted in the pilot symbol.

[1105] In addition, some frame configurations of modulated signals to be transmitted by the transmitter are described in this document. In this case, the aspect that "time division (time division) is performed" is described above. However, when two groups of data symbols are connected, there is a frequency division divided portion in the spliced portion. This aspect is described below with reference to FIG. 39.

[1106] FIG. 39 illustrates a symbol 3901 of data symbol group #1 and a symbol 3902 of data symbol group #2. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 39, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 4. In this case, the data symbol group #2 symbol is assembled from carrier 5 at time t0. Then only a portion at time t0 is exclusively subjected to frequency division. However, there is only a symbol of data symbol group #1 before time t0, and there is only a symbol of data symbol group #2 after time t0. At this point, time division of channels (time division of channels) is performed.

[1107] FIG. 40 illustrates another example. It should be noted that identical reference numbers are assigned to those in FIG. 39. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 40, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 4. Then, as illustrated at time t1, the data symbol group #1 symbol is terminated by carrier 5. Then, the data symbol group #2 symbol is assembled from carrier 5 at time t0, and the group symbol #2 data symbols are assembled from carrier 6 at time t1. Then the portions at time t0 and time t1 are exclusively subjected to frequency division. However, there is only a symbol for data symbol group #1 before time t0, and there is only a symbol for data symbol #2 after time t1. At this point, time division of channels (time division of channels) is performed.

[1108] As illustrated in FIG. 39 and 40, a case is envisaged in which, except for exceptional portions, there is a time at which there is no data symbol other than a symbol from data symbol group #1, but a pilot symbol or the like can be provided, and a time at which there is no data symbol other than a symbol in data symbol group #2, but a pilot symbol or the like may be provided. This case is referred to as "time division is performed (time division)". Therefore, the existing exclusive time based method is not limited to FIG. 39 and 40.

[1109] It should be noted that the present disclosure is not limited to each exemplary embodiment and may be performed with various modifications. For example, the case in which the present disclosure is performed as a communication device is described in each exemplary embodiment. However, the present disclosure is not limited to this case, and this communication method can also be used as software.

[1110] The transmitting antennas of the transmitting stations and base stations, the receiving antennas of the terminals, and one antenna described in the drawings may be configured with a plurality of antennas.

[1111] It should be noted that the program for implementing the above communication method may be stored in ROM (read only memory) in advance to instruct the CPU (central processing unit) to operate according to this program.

[1112] In addition, a program for carrying out the communication method may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium to write the program stored in the recording medium into the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer and cause the computer to operate according to the program.

[1113] In such a case, each configuration of each of the above-described exemplary embodiments and the like. may be implemented as an LSI (large scale integrated circuit), which is typically an integrated circuit having an input pin and an output pin. These integrated circuits may be formed as a single die separately, or may be formed as a single die such that they include all or part of the configuration of each exemplary embodiment. LSI is described here, but an integrated circuit may also be referred to as IC (integrated circuit), system LSI, super-LSI, and ultra-LSI, depending on the degree of integration. In addition, the circuit integration technology is not limited to LSI, and may be implemented by a dedicated circuit or a general purpose processor. Once the LSI is manufactured, a programmable FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or a reconfigurable processor can be used, which is reconfigurable due to the settings of the circuit elements within the LSI.

[1114] Additionally, when the development of semiconductor technology or other derived technology provides a circuit integration technology that replaces LSI, as expected, functional blocks can be integrated by using this technology. Alternatively, adaptation of biotechnology and the like may be envisaged.

[1115] The present disclosure is broadly applicable to a wireless system that transmits various modulated signals from multiple antennas, respectively. In addition, the present disclosure is also applicable to a case in which MIMO transmission is performed in a wired communication system having a plurality of transmission parts (for example, in a PLC (Power Line Communication) system, in an optical communication system, and in a DSL system ( digital subscriber line)).

[1116] It should be noted that the first exemplary embodiment is described by using baseband signals s ₁ (t), s ₁ (i), s ₂ (t), and s ₂ (i). In this case, the data to be transmitted with s ₁ (t) and (s ₁ (i) and the data to be transmitted with s ₂ (t) and s ₂ (i) may be identical.

[1117] In addition, s ₁ (t)=s ₂ (t) and s ₁ (i)=s ₂ (i) may be satisfied. In this case, the modulated signal of one stream is transmitted from multiple antennas.

[1118] Exemplary Embodiment C

The present exemplary embodiment describes data symbol grouping for terminals performed when a base station or access point (AP), for example, transmits a modulated signal indicated by a frame configuration based on the time and frequency axes described in this detailed description, for example, axes illustrated, for example, in FIG. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, and 65 (but the frame configuration is not limited thereto).

[1119] FIG. 72 illustrates an example of a relationship between a base station (access point) and terminals. The base station (AP) 7200-00 communicates with terminal #1 (7200-01), terminal #2 (7200-02),..., and terminal #n (7200-n) (n is a natural number, greater than or equal to 2). It should be noted that FIG. 72 illustrates an example of a state in which a base station (AP) communicates with terminals, but a state in which a base station (AP) communicates with terminals is not limited to the state in FIG. 72 and the base station (AP) is expected to communicate with at least one terminal.

[1120] FIG. 73 illustrates an example of communication between a base station and terminals in the present exemplary embodiment.

[1121] 1. First, the terminals send a request to send a group of data symbols to a base station (AP).

[1122] For example, when the base station (AP) and the terminals are in the state as illustrated in FIG. 72, terminal #1 (7200-01) sends a request for transmitting a group of data symbols to the base station (AP) 7200-00. Similarly, terminal #2 (7200-02) sends a request to send a group of data characters to the base station (AP) 7200-00. Similarly, terminal #n (7200-n) sends a request to send a group of data characters to the base station (AP) 7200-00.

[1123] 2. The base station receives, from each terminal, a modulated signal that includes a request for a group of data symbols. The base station obtains request information for the data symbol group from each terminal and determines an allocation of the data symbol groups included in the frame of the modulated signal that the base station transmits to the terminals.

[1124] For example, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits the modulated signal indicated by the frame configuration in FIG. 54. Base station (AP) 7200-00 receives data requests from terminal #1 (7200-01), terminal #2 (7200-02), terminal #3 (7200-03), terminal #4 (7200- 04), Terminal #5 (7200-05), Terminal #6 (7200-06), Terminal #7 (7200-07), and Terminal #8 (7200-08).

[1125] Then, the base station (AP) 7200-00 sets the data symbol group #1 (3401) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #8 (7200-08). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #8 (7200-08)) to terminal #8 (7200-08) using data symbol group #1 (3401) in FIG. 54.

[1126] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #2 (3402) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #7 (7200-07). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #7 (7200-07)) to terminal #7 (7200-07) using data symbol group #2 (3402) in FIG. 54.

[1127] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #3 (3403) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #6 (7200-06). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #6 (7200-06)) to terminal #6 (7200-06) using data symbol group #3 (3403) in FIG. 54.

[1128] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #4 (3404) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #5 (7200-05). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #5 (7200-05)) to terminal #5 (7200-05) using data symbol group #4 (3404) in FIG. 54.

[1129] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #5 (3405) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #4 (7200-04). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #4 (7200-04)) to terminal #4 (7200-04) using data symbol group #5 (3405) in FIG. 54.

[1130] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #6 (3406) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #3 (7200-03). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #3 (7200-03)) to terminal #3 (7200-03) using data symbol group #6 (3406) in FIG. 54.

[1131] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #7 (3407) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #2 (7200-02). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #2 (7200-02)) to terminal #2 (7200-02) using data symbol group #7 (3407) in FIG. 54.

[1132] The base station (AP) 7200-00 defines data symbol group #8 (3408) in FIG. 54 as a group of data symbols for transmitting data to terminal #1 (7200-01). Thus, the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #1 (7200-01)) to terminal #1 (7200-01) using data symbol group #8 (3408) in FIG. 54.

[1133] It should be noted that the data symbol group method of allocating data for terminals is not limited to the above-described method, and data symbol group #1 (3401) may be allocated to, for example, a terminal other than terminal #8 (7200-08). In addition, in the above description, the frame configuration of the modulated signal that the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits is the configuration in FIG. 54, but is not limited to this. The frame configuration of the modulated signal that the base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits may be the configuration illustrated, for example, in FIG. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, or 65 (or another frame configuration other than the above).

[1134] A method for configuring frames is possible in which information regarding a relationship between a group of data symbols and a terminal (such as, for example, information indicating that "group #8 (3408) of data symbols includes data for terminal #1 (7200 -01)" is included in the first preamble 3601 and/or the second preamble 3602 in FIG. 54.

[1135] It should be noted that the method for transmitting data symbol groups may be, for example, any of the SISO method, MISO method, and MIMO method. It should be noted that the details are described using the examples in this detailed description. The SISO method is a method by which, for example, one modulated signal is transmitted, or one modulated signal is transmitted using a plurality of antennas. It should be noted that the modulated signals transmitted from the antennas may be identical or different. The MISO method is, for example, a method that uses a space-time block code or a time-frequency block code. A MIMO method is a method for transmitting, for example, a plurality of modulated signals using, for example, a plurality of antennas.

[1136] Groups of data symbols may be used to convey any type of information including video information, audio information, and text information, or may be used to convey control data. In other words, data transmitted using data character groups can be any type of data.

[1137] 3. The terminals receive the modulated signal transmitted by the base station, extract the data symbol group that is required, demodulate the data symbol group, and acquire data.

[1138] For example, when the data symbol groups are allocated as described above, terminal #1 (7200-01) receives the modulated signal transmitted by the base station (AP) 7200-00, obtains "information regarding the relationship between the data symbol group and the terminal" included in the first preamble 3601 and/or the second preamble 3602 extracts the data symbol group that includes data for terminal #1 (7200-01), namely the data symbol group #8 (3408), and demodulates (and performs decoding with error correction) group #8 (3408) data symbols, thereby obtaining data.

[1139] FIG. 74 illustrates a configuration example of a base station (AP) in the present exemplary embodiment.

[1140] The receiving module 7400-07 receives the received signal input 7400-06, which is received by the antenna 7400-05. The receiving module 7400-07 performs processes such as frequency conversion, signal processing such as for OFDM, inverse transform (demodulation), and error correction decoding, and outputs received data 7400-08.

[1141] The transmitter module 7400-02 receives inputs, such as transmit data 7400-01, which includes control information to be transmitted, such as in the preamble, and received data 7400-08. The 7400-02 transmitter module performs, for the 7400-01 transmitted data, processes such as error correction coding, conversion using the modulation method that is specified, signal processing such as for OFDM, frequency conversion and gain, and generates and outputs the modulated signal 7400-03, the modulated signal 7400-03 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7400-04, and one or more terminals receive the modulated signal 7400-03.

[1142] It should be noted that the transmitter module 7400-02 receives the input of the received data 7400-08. At this time, the received data 7400-08 includes information regarding requests for data transmission from the terminals. Accordingly, based on information regarding data transmission requests from the terminals, the transmitter module 7400-02 generates a modulated signal for the frame configuration in FIG. 54 as described above. At this time, the transmission module 7400-02 allocates, to the terminals, data symbol groups 3401, 3402, 3403, 3404, 3405, 3406, 3407, and 3408, as described above, based on information regarding data transmission requests from the terminals. In addition, the transmitter module 7400-02 generates the first preamble and/or the second preamble in FIG. 54 that include data symbol groups participating in allocation to terminals based on information regarding data transmission requests from the terminals and terminal related information such as information indicating, for example, "data symbol group #8 (3408) includes data for terminal #1 (7200-01)."

[1143] It should be noted that configuration examples of a transmitter included in a base station (AP) are as illustrated in FIG. 1, 58 and 76 and the configuration in FIG. 76 is described below.

[1144] FIG. 74, a base station (AP) includes one antenna 7400-04 for transmission, but the present disclosure is not limited to one antenna, and a base station (AP) may include a plurality of antennas for transmission. At this time, the transmission unit 7400-02 transmits a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality of transmission antennas, and thereby generates a plurality of modulated signals.

[1145] Similarly, in FIG. 74, a base station (AP) includes a single receive antenna 7400-05, but the present disclosure is not limited to a single antenna, and a base station (AP) may include a plurality of receive antennas. At this time, a plurality of modulated signals are received using a plurality of antennas, and the receiving unit 7400-07 performs signal processing on the plurality of modulated signals, thereby obtaining received data.

[1146] FIG. 75 illustrates a configuration example of a terminal in the present exemplary embodiment.

[1147] The receiving module 7500-07 receives the input of the received signal 7500-06 received through the antenna 7500-05, performs processes such as frequency conversion, signal processing, for example, for OFDM, inverse transformation (demodulation), and error correction decoding, and outputs received data 7500-08.

[1148] The transmitter module 7500-02 receives inputs, such as transmit data 7500-01, which includes control information transmitted in the preamble, for example, and received data 7500-08. The transmitter module 7500-02 performs, for the transmitted data 7500-01, error correction coding, conversion using a modulation method that is specified, signal processing such as OFDM, frequency conversion and gain, and generates and outputs a modulated signal 7500-03. The modulated signal 7500-03 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7500-04 and the base station (AP) receives the modulated signal 7500-03.

[1149] It should be noted that the transmitting module 7500-02 receives the input of the received data 7500-08. At this time, the received data 7500-08 may include control information from the base station (AP). At this time, the transmission unit 7500-02 may set, based on control information from the base station (AP), a transmission method, a frame configuration, a modulation method, and an error correction coding method, for example, and may generate a modulated signal.

[1150] It should be noted that a configuration example of a terminal receiver is as illustrated in FIG. 23 and 78 and the configuration in FIG. 78 is described below. When a modulated signal transmitted by the base station is received, the terminal receiver obtains the first preamble and/or the second preamble to obtain information on the data symbol group to be demodulated, and then extracts the required data symbol group and performs demodulation and error correction decoding. in the symbol group of the retrieved data, thereby obtaining the received data.

[1151] FIG. 75, the terminal includes one antenna 7500-04 for transmission, but the present disclosure is not limited to one antenna, and the terminal may include a plurality of antennas for transmission. At this time, a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted using a plurality of transmission antennas, and the transmitter module 7500-02 generates a plurality of modulated signals.

[1152] Similarly, in FIG. 75, the terminal includes one antenna 7500-05 for reception, but the present disclosure is not limited to one antenna, and the terminal may include a plurality of antennas for reception. At this time, a plurality of modulated signals are received using a plurality of antennas, and the receiving unit 7500-07 performs signal processing on the plurality of modulated signals, thereby obtaining received data.

[1153] FIG. 76 illustrates a configuration example of a transmission unit included in a base station (AP) in the present exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that in FIG. 76, identical reference numbers are assigned to elements that operate identically to the elements in FIG. 58.

[1154] The transmission method designation information 5811 includes information regarding allocation of character groups for terminals. For example, the transmission method designation information 5811 includes information indicating that "data symbol group #1 is for transmitting data to terminal #8".

[1155] The transmission method instruction module 5812 receives input of transmission method designation information 5811 and outputs information 5813 regarding the transmission method. For example, information 5813 regarding the transmission method includes information regarding allocation of data symbol groups for terminals, information regarding a method for transmitting data symbol groups, information regarding a method for modulating data symbol groups, information regarding an error correction coding method (code length, coding rate ) for groups of data symbols and information regarding frame configuration.

[1156] The data symbol group generator 7600-00 receives inputs of data 5801 and transmission method information 5813, and generates baseband signals for the data symbol groups based on the transmission method information 5813.

[1157] The frame configuration module 7600-01 receives inputs of baseband signals 5805 for data symbols, baseband signal 5808 for control information symbol, baseband signal 5810 for pilot symbol, and transmission method information 5813. The frame configuration module 7600-01 generates and outputs the modulated signal 7600-02, for example, according to the frame configuration of FIG. 54 based on the frame configuration information included in the transmission method information 5813. Note that, as described above, the frame configuration is not limited to the frame configuration in FIG. 54.

[1158] The radio module 5861 receives inputs of the modulated signal 7600-02 according to the frame configuration and information regarding the transmission method. The radio module 5816 performs processes such as frequency conversion and amplification on the modulated signal 7600-02 according to the frame configuration, and generates and outputs the transmit signal 5817. The transmit signal 5817 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 5818.

[1159] FIG. 77 illustrates a configuration example of the data symbol group generator 7600-00 included in the base station (AP) in FIG. 76.

[1160] Data symbol group #1 generator 7700-02-1 receives inputs of data #1 (7700-01-1) and information 7700-00 (5813) regarding transmission methods. The data symbol group #1 generator 7700-02-1 performs processes such as error correction coding and modulation based on information regarding allocation of data symbol groups to terminals, information regarding methods for transmitting data symbol groups, information regarding methods for modulating symbol groups data and information on error correction coding methods (code length, coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in information 7700-00 on transmission methods, and outputs a baseband signal for data symbol group 7700-03-1 #1 .

[1161] Data symbol group #2 generator 7700-02-2 receives data inputs #2 (7700-01-2) and transmission method information 7700-00 (5813). The data symbol group #2 generator 7700-02-2 performs processes such as error correction coding and modulation based on information regarding allocation of data symbol groups to terminals, information regarding methods for transmitting data symbol groups, information regarding methods for modulating symbol groups data and information on error correction coding methods (code length, coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in the transmission methods information 7700-00, and outputs a baseband signal for data symbol group 7700-03-2 #2 .

Similar processing continues.

[1162] The shaper 7700-02-m groups #m data symbols receives input data #m (7700-01-m) and information 7700-00 (5813) regarding transmission methods. The data symbol group #m generator 7700-02-m performs processes such as error correction coding and modulation based on information regarding allocation of data symbol groups to terminals, information regarding methods for transmitting data symbol groups, information regarding methods for modulating symbol groups data and information on error correction coding methods (code length, coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in transmission method information 7700-00, and outputs baseband signal for data symbol group #m 7700-03-m (Note that m is an integer greater than or equal to 1, or is an integer greater than or equal to 2).

[1163] FIG. 78 illustrates a configuration example of a receiving module included in the terminal in the present exemplary embodiment. It should be noted that in FIG. 78, identical reference numbers are assigned to elements that operate identically to the elements in FIG. 23.

[1164] An OFDM-associated processor 2303_X receives an input of a received signal 2302_X received via an antenna 2301_X. The OFDM-related processor 2303_X performs the OFDM-related signal processing and outputs the signal 2304_X obtained as a result of the signal processing.

[1165] The detector/demodulator 2311 of the first preambles receives an input signal 2304_X obtained as a result of signal processing. For example, the first preamble detector/demodulator 2311 detects and demodulates the first preamble in FIG. 54 and outputs the first preamble control information 2312. It should be noted that this may be applicable to a different frame configuration than the frame configuration of FIG. 54.

[1166] The demodulator 2313 of the second preambles receives inputs of the signal 2304_X obtained as a result of signal processing and the control information 2312 of the first preamble. For example, the second preamble demodulator 2313 demodulates the second preamble in FIG. 54 and outputs the second preamble control information 2314.

[1167] Control signal generator 2315 receives inputs of first preamble control information 2312 and second preamble control information 2314, and outputs control signal 2316. It should be noted that control signal 2316 includes information regarding allocation of data symbol groups for terminals.

[1168] The channel jitter estimation unit 7800-01 receives inputs of signal 2304_X obtained as a signal processing result and control signal 2316. The signal processor 2309 receives inputs of signal 2304_X obtained as a signal processing result and control signal 2316. Based on the control signal 2316, the channel jitter estimator 7800-01 estimates the channel using the preamble and the pilot symbol included in the signal 2304_X obtained as a signal processing result, and outputs the channel estimation signal 7800-02.

[1169] The signal processor 2309 receives inputs of the channel estimate signal 7800-02, the signal 2304_X obtained as a result of signal processing, and the control signal 2316. Based on the information regarding allocation of data symbol groups for terminals included in the control signal 2316, the signal processor extracts the desired data symbol group from the signal 2304_X obtained as a signal processing result, performs processes such as demodulation and error correction decoding on the extracted data symbol group, and outputs received data 2310.

[1170] As described above, the terminal that is the destination is appropriately set for each group of data symbols in the modulated signal that the base station (AP) transmits, whereby the advantage of improving data transmission efficiency by the base station (AP) can be obtained. .

[1171] For example, when a base station (AP) transmits a frame, as illustrated in FIG. 54, by means of time division channels, the above transmission method is more optimal in terms of improving data transmission efficiency.

[1172] It should be noted that, as described in other exemplary embodiments, specific symbols (5304, 5305) are arranged on specific carriers, as illustrated in FIG. 53 in the period from time t1 to time t3 in the frame configuration of FIG. 54. At this time, specific symbols (5304, 5305) on specific carriers may be groups of data symbols. For example, the symbols on a particular carrier may be a group of #100 data symbols.

[1173] Exemplary Embodiment D

In the present exemplary embodiment, further description is given regarding the "method for inserting dummy symbols (or dummy slots) in a data symbol group" described with reference to FIG. 64.

[1174] FIG. 79 illustrates a configuration example of a modulated signal frame that a base station (AP) transmits in the present exemplary embodiment, and identical reference numbers are assigned to an element that operates identically to that shown in FIG. 2.

[1175] FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal that a base station (AP) transmits in the present exemplary embodiment, and the vertical axis indicates frequency while the horizontal axis indicates time.

[1176] In a frame, there are carriers 1-64 in the frequency direction, and there are symbols for each carrier.

[1177] The base station (AP) transmits the first preamble 201 and the second preamble 202 in the period from time t0 to time t1, as illustrated in FIG. 79.

[1178] In the period from time t2 to time t1, the base station (AP) transmits data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3 ) 7900-03 data characters and group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data characters.

[1179] In the period from time t2 to time t3, the base station (AP) transmits the first preamble 7900-51 and the second preamble 7900-52.

[1180] In the period from time t3 to time t4, the base station (AP) transmits data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7 ) 7900-07 data characters, data character group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data character group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09.

[1181] In the period from time t4 to time t5, the base station (AP) transmits the first preamble 7900-53 and the second preamble 7900-54.

[1182] In the period from time t5 to time t6, the base station (AP) transmits data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11.

[1183] FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is a data symbol group for which carriers 1-15 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times $1-$10000 are used in the time direction (there are symbols in the carrier direction as well as there are symbols in the direction of time).

[1184] Similarly, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is a data symbol group for which carriers 16-31 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times $1-$10000 are used in the time direction (there are symbols in the carrier direction , and there are also symbols in the direction of time).

[1185] Data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is a data symbol group for which carriers 32-46 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times $1-$10000 are used in the time direction. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

[1186] Data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is a data symbol group for which carriers 47-64 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times $1-$10000 are used in the time direction. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

[1187] As described above, in the frame of FIG. 79, data character group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data character group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data character group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 and data character group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900- The 04 data symbols are subjected to frequency division multiplexing.

1-

8000 используются в направлении времени. Имеются символы в направлении несущей, а также имеются символы в направлении времени.[1188] FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is a data symbol group for which carriers 1-15 are used in the frequency axis direction, and the times

1-

8000 are used in the direction of time. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

1-

8000 используются в направлении времени. Имеются символы в направлении несущей, а также имеются символы в направлении времени.[1189] Similarly, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is a data symbol group for which carriers 16-29 are used in the frequency axis direction, and the times

1-

8000 are used in the direction of time. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

1-

8000 используются в направлении времени. Имеются символы в направлении несущей, а также имеются символы в направлении времени.[1190] Data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is a data symbol group for which carriers 30-38 are used in the frequency axis direction, and the times

1-

8000 are used in the direction of time. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

1-

8000 используются в направлении времени. Имеются символы в направлении несущей, а также имеются символы в направлении времени.[1191] Data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is a data symbol group for which carriers 39-52 are used in the frequency axis direction, and the times

1-

8000 are used in the direction of time. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

1-

8000 используются в направлении времени. Имеются символы в направлении несущей, а также имеются символы в направлении времени.[1192] Data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is a data symbol group for which carriers 53-64 are used in the frequency axis direction, and the times

1-

8000 are used in the direction of time. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

[1193] Accordingly, in the frame of FIG. 79, group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900- 08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols are subjected to frequency division multiplexing.

[1194] FIG. 79, data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is a data symbol group for which carriers 1-64 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times *1-*50 are used in the time direction. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

[1195] Similarly, data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 is a data symbol group for which carriers 1-64 are used in the frequency axis direction, and times *51-*81 are used in the time direction. There are symbols in the carrier direction and there are also symbols in the time direction.

[1196] It should be noted that FIG. 79 illustrates a case in which data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 are time division multiplexed, but can accommodate, for example, a configuration in which group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 data characters are not included. In addition, the frame configuration in which the first preamble and the second preamble are included between the data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and the data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 can be adapted as another example.

[1197] It should be noted that the first preambles 201, 7900-51, and 7900-53 in FIG. 79 may include characters other than preamble characters (or may not include characters other than preamble characters). In addition, not all carriers from carrier 1 to carrier 64 may be used to transmit the symbols of the first preamble. For example, a symbol for which the I-in phase component is zero and the Q quadrature component is zero may be present on a particular carrier.

[1198] Similarly, the second preambles 202, 7900-52, and 7900-54 in FIG. 79 may include a character other than the preamble characters, or may not include characters other than the preamble characters. In addition, not all carriers from carrier 1 to carrier 64 may be used to transmit second preamble symbols. For example, a symbol for which the I-in phase component is zero and the Q quadrature component is zero may be present on a particular carrier.

[1199] Group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data characters group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 data characters group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 data characters group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900 -04 data characters group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters group #FD8 (#TFD8) ) 7900-08 data characters group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data characters group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data characters and group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 data characters may include the character , other than a data character, or cannot include a character other than a data character. On a particular carrier, a pilot symbol may be provided, which may be used for channel jitter estimation, phase noise estimation, frequency offset estimation, frequency synchronization, and time synchronization, for example.

[1200] FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 and data symbol group #FD(#TFD5) 7900-05 are transmitted using carriers 1 to 15, and are symbols arranged on specific carriers and corresponding to symbols 5304 and 5305, arranged on particular carriers in FIG. 53 in the description given with reference to FIG. 52, 53 and 54 in the sixth exemplary embodiment.

[1201] It should be noted that for a group of data symbols and a terminal, such a relationship can be provided as described in Exemplary Embodiment C. With respect to this aspect, as detailed in Exemplary Embodiment C, for example:

- The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #1 using group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data symbols. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #1.

[1202] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #2 using group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 data symbols. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #2.

[1203] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #3 using group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 data symbols. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #3.

[1204] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #4 using group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data characters. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #4.

As described above, frequency division multiple access is performed using groups of data symbols present in the period from time t1 to time t2. It should be noted that orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) is performed when an OFDM method is used.

[1205] Similarly:

- The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #A using group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #A.

[1206] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #B using group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data symbols. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #B.

[1207] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #C using group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data symbols. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #C.

[1208] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #D using group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data characters. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #D.

[1209] - The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #E using group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data characters. Accordingly, data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #E.

As described above, frequency division multiple access is performed using groups of data symbols present in the period from time t3 to time t4. It should be noted that orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) is performed when an OFDM method is used.

[1210] The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #α using the group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols. Accordingly, the data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal α.

[1211] The base station (AP) transmits data to the terminal #β using the group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 data symbols. Accordingly, the data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 is a data symbol group for transmitting data to the terminal β.

[1212] Groups of data symbols subjected to time division (or time division multiplexing), frequency division (or frequency division multiplexing), and time domain division and frequency division (or channel division multiplexing) are described. time domain and frequency domain division multiplexing) in the frames illustrated, for example, in FIG. 54 and 79. It should be noted that the following applies to the frames described in this detailed description, not limited to the frames illustrated in FIG. 54 and 79.

[1213] The following describes another example of the configuration of the time boundary or frequency boundary between groups of data symbols.

[1214] For example, the state as illustrated in FIG. 80 is considered when groups of data symbols are separated in the time direction. Fig. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of channelization in the time direction.

[1215] FIG. 80, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). Fig. 80 illustrates an example in which the first region, the second region, the third region, and the fourth region are obtained as groups of data symbols by channeling in the time direction.

[1216] As illustrated in FIG. 80, the first region and the second region are present at the time t1. At time t2 and time t3, the second region and the third region are present. The third region and the fourth region do not overlap in the time direction. Cases including such cases are defined as "time channel division". For example, time division of channels may be performed such that a plurality of groups of data symbols are present at a certain time, as illustrated in FIG. 80.

[1217] In addition, the region may have different time widths at different frequencies, as seen from the first to third regions in FIG. 80. In particular, the region may not be a quadrilateral in the time-frequency plane. Cases including such cases are defined as "time channel division".

[1218] For example, the state as illustrated in FIG. 81 should be considered when separating groups of data symbols in the frequency direction. Fig. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of channelization in the frequency direction.

[1219] FIG. 81, the horizontal axis indicates frequency (carrier) and the vertical axis indicates time. Fig. 81 illustrates an example of a case in which the first region, the second region, the third region, and the fourth region are obtained as groups of data symbols by channeling in the frequency direction.

[1220] As illustrated in FIG. 81, a first region and a second region are present on carrier c1. In addition, the second region and the third region are present on carrier c2 and carrier c3. The third region and the fourth region do not overlap in the frequency direction. Cases including such cases are defined as "channelization in the frequency direction". For example, frequency division may be performed such that a plurality of data symbol groups are present on a particular frequency (carrier), as illustrated in FIG. 81.

[1221] In addition, a region may have different frequency widths at different times, as seen from the first to third regions in FIG. 81. In particular, the region may not be a quadrilateral in the time-frequency plane. Cases including such cases are defined as "channelization in the frequency direction".

[1222] When groups of data symbols are subjected to time domain channel division and frequency domain channel division (or time domain division multiplexing and frequency domain division multiplexing), the data symbol groups may be separated in the time direction, as illustrated in fig. 80 and split in the frequency direction as illustrated in FIG. 81. In particular, one region of a group of data symbols in the time-frequency plane may have different frequency widths at different times, and furthermore, may have different time widths at different frequencies.

[1223] Of course, frequency division can be performed to obtain data symbol groups as shown by data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 ( #TFD3) 7900-03 data symbols and group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols in FIG. 79 so that there is no carrier (frequency) on which two or more groups of data symbols are present.

[1224] Further, time division may be performed to obtain data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11, as illustrated in FIG. 79, so that there is no time (time period) in which two or more groups of data symbols are present.

[1225] FIG. 64, for example, illustrates an example in which dummy symbols (or dummy slots) are inserted into data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 in FIG. 79. An example similar to the example below has already been described with reference to FIG. 63 and 64.

[1226] For example, the data symbols are preferably assembled from the smaller temporal index in the data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01. A rule is adopted that if data symbols are arranged on all occupied carriers at a certain time, data symbols are assembled on carriers at a time after a certain time.

[1227] For example, in the data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), as illustrated in FIG. 64, a data symbol is arranged on carrier 1 at time $10001, and thereafter data symbols are assembled on carrier 2 at time $10001, carrier 3 at time $10001,..., carrier 9 at time $10001, and carrier 10 at time $10001. Then, moving to time $10002, data symbols are assembled on carrier 1 at time $10002, carrier 2 at time $10002, and so on.

[1228] At time $13995, data symbols are arranged on carrier 1 at time $13995, carrier 2 at time $13995, carrier 3 at time $13995, carrier 4 at time $13995, carrier 5 at time $13995, and carrier 6 at time $13995. This completes the layout of the data symbols.

[1229] However, symbols as data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) are present on carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time $13995, on carriers 1-10 at time $13996, on carriers 1-10 at time $13,997, on carriers 1-10 at $13,998, on carriers 1-10 at $13,999, and on carriers 1-10 10 at $14,000. Thus, dummy symbols are assembled on carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time $13995, on carriers 1-10 at time $13996, on carriers 1-10 at time $13997, on carriers 1-10 at time $13998, at carriers 1-10 at $13,999 and carriers 1-10 10 at $14,000.

[1230] If necessary, dummy symbols are also arranged, using the identical method as described above, into data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3, (#TFD3) 7900-03, group # FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data characters, group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data characters, group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data characters, group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data characters, and group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 characters data in Fig. 79.

[1231] As described above, a dummy symbol is inserted into a time division multiplexed data symbol group, a time division multiplexed data symbol group, and a specific carrier data symbol group, whereby the receiving the device easily sorts the data symbols and demodulates and decodes the data, and moreover, the advantage of preventing data rate drop due to dummy symbols can be obtained.

[1232] It should be noted that in the example of FIG. 79, a frame is described in which "preambles", "frequency division symbols", "preambles", "frequency division symbols", "preambles", "time division symbols", or in other words, "preambles", "frequency division-divisioned symbols", "preambles", "frequency-divisioned symbols", "preambles", "non-frequency-divisioned symbol groups" are arranged along the time axis in this order, but however, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, a frame in which "preambles", "time division symbols", "preambles" and "frequency division symbols" are arranged in this order along the time axis may be adapted, or a frame may be adapted in which " preambles", "non-frequency division-divisioned symbol groups", "preambles", and "frequency-divisioned symbols" are arranged in this order along the time axis.

[1233] The method of inserting a dummy symbol group in a data symbol group is not limited to the method illustrated in FIG. 64. The following describes an example of a method for inserting dummy symbols, which is different from the method illustrated in FIG. 64.

[1234] The number of symbols (or the number of slots) is U in data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group #TD Z (e.g., X, Y, and Z are integers greater than or equal to 1 ). U is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

[1235] First, "V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1) is provided, which denotes the number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data is placed that is an integer multiple of an FEC block (having a code block length error-correcting code or code length for error-correcting code)". Note that U-α+1≤V≤U must be satisfied; α denotes the number of symbols (or the number of slots) required to transmit a block having an error correction code block length (code length) (unit: bit) and is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

[1236] When U-V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U-V symbols (or U-V slots) are added. Thus, data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, or data symbol group #TD Z includes data symbols in V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols in U-V symbols (or U-V slots). Each dummy symbol has a specific value for the in-phase I component and also a specific value for the quadrature Q component.

[1237] Data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group #TD Z satisfy "include data symbols in V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols in U-V symbols (or U-V slots). ).

[1238] Specifically, when data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group #TD Z are to have dummy symbols (or dummy slots), dummy symbols (dummy slots) are inserted into each symbol group data.

[1239] The following describes a configuration example of a base station (AP) that uses a dummy character insertion method.

[1240] The base station (AP) configuration is the configuration in FIG. 1, in which the data generator 102 and the frame configuration module 110 are replaced by the data generator and the frame configuration module in FIG. 82. Next, FIG. 82.

[1241] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 82, which operate identically to the elements in FIG. 1.

[1242] An 8200-02-1 error-correcting encoder for data symbol group #1 receives data inputs 8200-01-1 for data symbol group #1 (for example, for terminal #1) and control signals 8200-00 and 109. On based on the information regarding the error correction coding method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, such as, for example, information regarding the error correction code, the code length for the error correction code, and the coding rate of the error correction code, the encoder 8200-02 -1 error correction performs error correction encoding on data 8200-01-1 for data symbol group #1, and outputs data 8200-03-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result of error correction encoding.

[1243] Similarly, the data symbol group #2 error correction encoder 8200-02-2 receives data inputs 8200-01-2 for data symbol group #2 (eg, for terminal #2) and control signals 8200-00 and 109 Based on information regarding the error correction coding method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, such as, for example, information regarding the error correction code, the code length for the error correction code, and the coding rate of the error correction code, the encoder 8200 -02-2 error correction performs error correction encoding on data 8200-01-2 for data symbol group #2, and outputs data 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of error correction encoding.

Similar processing continues.

[1244] An 8200-02-N encoder with error correction for data symbol group #N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1) receives 8200-01-N data inputs for data symbol group #N (e.g., for terminal #n ) and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on information regarding the error correction coding method included in control signals 8200-00 and 109, such as, for example, information regarding the error correction code, code length for the error correction code, and error correction code rate, the 8200-02-N error correction encoder performs error correction encoding on the 8200-01-N data for group #N of data symbols, and outputs the data 8200-03-N for group #N of data symbols received as a result of error correction encoding.

[1245] The interleaver 8200-04-1 for data symbol group 1 receives data inputs 8200-03-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result of error correction encoding and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on information regarding the reassembly method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, the interleaver 8200-04-1 reassembles data 8200-03-1 for group #1 of data symbols obtained as a result of error correction encoding, and outputs the reassembly data 8200 -05-1 for group #1 data characters.

[1246] Similarly, the interleaving module 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2 receives data inputs 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of error correction encoding and control signals 8200-00 and 109 Based on the information regarding the reassembly method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, the interleaver 8200-04-2 reassembles data 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of error correction encoding and outputs repackaged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2.

Similar processing continues.

[1247] The interleaver 8200-04-N for data symbol group #N receives data inputs 8200-3-N for data symbol group #N obtained as a result of error correction encoding and control signals 8200-00 and 109. On based on the information regarding the reassembly method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, the interleaver module 8200-04-N reassemblies the data 8200-03-N for group #N of data symbols obtained as the result of error correction encoding and outputs the reassembly data 8200-05-N for group #N data characters.

[1248] Transformation module 8200-06-1 for data symbol group #1 receives inputs of repackaged data 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1 and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on the information regarding the modulation method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, the conversion unit 8200-06-1 converts the repackaged data 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, and outputs signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a data conversion result.

[1249] Similarly, the transform module 8200-06-2 for data symbol group #2 receives inputs of repackaged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2 and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on the modulation method information included into control signals 8200-00 and 109, the conversion module 8200-06-2 converts the repackaged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2, and outputs the 8200-07-2 signal for data symbol group #2 obtained as the conversion result data.

Similar processing continues.

[1250] The transform module 8200-06-N for group #N of data symbols receives inputs of repackaged data 8200-05-N for group #N of data symbols and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on the information regarding the modulation method included in the control signals 8200-00 and 109, the conversion module 8200-06-N converts the repackaged data 8200-05-N for group #N of data symbols and outputs the signal 8200-07-N for group #1 of data symbols obtained as a result of the data conversion.

[1251] The frame configuration unit 110 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a data conversion result, signal 8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a data conversion result. .., and signal 8200-07-N for group #N of data symbols obtained as a result of data conversion, baseband (quadrature) signal 106 for the second preamble and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on configuration information frame included in control signals 8200-00 and 109, examples of which are the frame configurations illustrated, for example, in FIG. 54 and 79, the frame configuration module 110 outputs the baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_1 for stream 1 according to the frame configuration and/or the baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_2 for stream 2 according to the frame configuration. It should be noted that the frame configurations are not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 54 and 79.

[1252] For example, when the control signals 8200-00 and 109 designate a MIMO transmission and a MISO transmission, the frame configuration module 110 outputs a baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_1 for stream 1 according to the frame configuration and a baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_2 baseband for stream 2 according to the frame configuration.

[1253] When the control signals 8200-00 and 109 indicate SISO transmission, the frame configuration module 110 outputs, for example, baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_1 for stream 1 according to the frame configuration.

[1254] It should be noted that the subsequent processing is as illustrated with reference to FIG. 1. In addition, the configurations illustrated in FIG. 1 and 82 are device configuration examples, and the present disclosure is not limited to the configurations.

[1255] Another configuration example of a base station (AP) has been described.

[1256] Another base station (AP) configuration is the configuration illustrated in FIG. 76, in which the data symbol group generator 7600-00 and the frame configuration module 7600-01 are replaced by the data symbol group generator and the frame configuration module in FIG. 83.

[1257] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 83 which operate identically to that shown in FIG. 58, 76 and 82, and description of such elements is omitted.

[1258] The frame configuration module 7600-01 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a data transformation result, signal 8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a data transformation result ,..., signal 8200-07-N for group #N of data symbols obtained as a result of data conversion, baseband signal 5808 for the control symbol, baseband signal 5810 for the pilot symbol, and control signals 8200-00 and 5831. Based on the frame configuration information included in control signals 8200-00 and 5831, examples of which are the frame configurations illustrated in FIG. 54 and 79, the frame configuration module 7600-01 outputs the modulated signal 7600-02 according to the frame configuration. It should be noted that the frame configurations are not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 54 and 79.

[1259] It should be noted that the subsequent processes are as described with reference to FIG. 76. The configurations illustrated in FIG. 76 and 83 show device examples, but the present disclosure is not limited to the configurations.

[1260] Operation examples of interleaver module 8200-04-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver module 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and interleaver module 8200-04-N for symbol group #N data in Fig. 82 and 83, for example, will be described with reference to FIGS. 84.

[1261] The number of symbols (or the number of slots) in data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, data symbol group #TD Z (for example, X, Y, and Z are integers greater than or equal to 1) is U. U is an integer greater than or equal to 1. The number of bits to transmit each symbol (or each time slice) is C. C is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

[1262] "V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1) is provided, which indicates the number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data is placed that is an integer multiple of an FEC block (having an error correction code block length or code length for error-correcting code)". Note that U-α+1≤V≤U must be satisfied (α denotes the number of symbols (or the number of slots) needed to transmit a block having an error correction code block length (code length) (unit: bit ), and is an integer greater than or equal to 1).

[1263] When U-V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U-V symbols (or U-V slots) are added. Thus, data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, or data symbol group #TD Z includes data symbols in V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols in U-V symbols (or U-V slots). Each dummy symbol has a specific value for the in-phase I component and also a specific value for the quadrature Q component.

[1264] Data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group #TD Z satisfy "include data symbols in V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols in U-V symbols (or U-V slots). ).

[1265] Thus, when U-V≠0, the number of data bits for data symbols (which is an integer multiple of the FEC block (having the error correction code block length) or (having the code length for the error correction code) is C x V =A x C x α bits (A is an integer greater than or equal to 1), and the number of data bits for dummy symbols is C x (U-V).

[1266] FIG. 84 illustrates when U-V≠0, examples of operation of interleaver 8200-04-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and interleaver 8200-04-N for group #N of data symbols, for example in FIG. 82 and 83 with respect to "data for data symbols" having C x V=A x C x α bits (A is an integer greater than or equal to 1) and "data for dummy symbols" having C x (U-V) bits.

[1267] Part (a) of FIG. 84 illustrates an example of data configuration before repackaging. For example, data is arranged in the order of data for data symbols and data for dummy symbols. It should be noted that the data layout before repackaging is not limited to (a) in FIG. 84.

[1268] Part (b) of FIG. 84 illustrates data obtained by rearranging the sequence of data illustrated in (a) of FIG. 84. In particular, (b) of FIG. 84 illustrates data obtained by repackaging CxU bit data. The data repackaging method may be performed according to any rule.

[1269] A transform module 8200-06-1 for data symbol group #1, a transform module 8200-06-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and a transform module 8200-06-N for data symbol group #N, illustrated, for example, in Fig. 82 and 83 convert the re-arranged data illustrated in (b) of FIG. 84.

[1270] It should be noted that the data reassembly method used by the interleaver 8200-04-1 for data symbol group #1, the data reassembly method used by the interleaver 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2,... , and the data repackaging method used by the interleaving module 8200-04-N for group #N of data symbols may be identical or different from each other.

[1271] As described above, when "data for data symbols" and "data for dummy symbols" are re-arranged, the arrangement of data symbols and dummy symbols of the data character group is not limited to the arrangement, as illustrated in FIG. 64. For example, dummy symbols may be arranged at any position in a group of data symbols along the time and frequency axes. In addition, it may be that the symbols or timeslots include "data" and "dummy data".

[1272] Interleaver 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and interleaver 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N may switch between recompositing methods for each frame. One or more (interleavers) of interleaver 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and interleaver 8200-05-N for group #N data characters may not reflow the data. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 and data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 arranged on specific carriers in FIG. 79 are not repackaged. This results in the advantage that the receiver can receive data symbol group data on a particular carrier with less delay.

[1273] FIG. 85 illustrates an example configuration of an interleaver module 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, an interleaver module 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and an interleaver module 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N . It should be noted that identical reference numbers are assigned to elements that operate identically to the elements in FIG. 82 and 83.

[1274] The dummy data generator 8500-01 receives the control signal input 8200-00. The dummy data generator 8500-01 generates dummy data based on information regarding dummy data included in the control signal 8200-00, an example of which is the number of bits used to create dummy data, and outputs dummy data 8500-02.

[1275] The interleaver 8500-04 receives data inputs 8500-03 obtained as a result of error correction encoding (for example, corresponding to data 8200-03-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result of error correction encoding, data 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as the result of error correction encoding,... and data 8200-03-N for data symbol group #N obtained as the result of error correction encoding in FIG. 82 and 83), dummy data 8500-02 and control signal 8200-00. Based on the information regarding the interleaving method included in the control signal 8200-00, the interleaver 8500-04 re-arranges the data 8500-03 obtained as a result of error correction encoding and the dummy data 8500-02, and outputs the re-arranged data 8500-05 ( for example, corresponding to the repackaged data 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, the repackaged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and the repackaged data 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N on Fig. 82 and 83).

[1276] It should be noted that, for example, a method for configuring data (or dummy data) of a dummy symbol using data known to the transmitter and receiver is possible.

[1277] For example, the first preamble and/or the second preamble in a frame, as illustrated in FIG. 54 and 79 may include information such as "information relevant to the carrier and time that each data symbol group uses", "information relevant to the number of bits (or number of symbols) of dummy data (or dummy symbols) that shall be inserted in each data symbol group", "information regarding the transmission method of each data symbol group", "information relevant to the modulation method (or set of modulation methods) of each data symbol group", "information relevant to the interleaving method used by each data symbol groups" and "information relevant to the error correction code used by each data symbol group". Accordingly, the receiver can demodulate the data symbols of each group of data symbols. It should be noted that the frame configurations are not limited to the configurations illustrated in, for example, FIG. 54 and 79.

[1278] As described above, the data for the data symbols are arranged discretely in the symbols present along the time and frequency axes by re-arranging the data for the data symbols and the dummy data, whereby time and frequency diversity gains can be obtained, so that an advantage can be obtained. improving the quality of the data received by the receiving device.

[1279] Another configuration example of a base station (AP) to which the dummy symbol insertion method is applied.

[1280] The base station (AP) configuration is the configuration in FIG. 1, in which the data generator 102 and the frame configuration module 110 are replaced by the data generator and the frame configuration module in FIG. 86. Next, FIG. 86.

[1281] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 86, which operate identically to the elements in FIG. 1 and 82, and description of such elements is omitted.

[1282] The carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 for data symbol group #1 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a data conversion result and control signal 8200-00. The carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 interleaves the carrier for the signal 8200-07-1 for the data symbol group #1 obtained as the data conversion result based on the information regarding the carrier interleaving method included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the signal 8600-02-1 for data symbol group #1 for which the carrier is interleaved. Note that carrier interleaving is described below.

[1283] Similarly, the carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbol group #2 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a data conversion result and control signal 8200-00. The carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 interleaves the carrier for the signal 8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a data conversion result based on the information regarding the carrier interleaving method included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the signal 8600-02-2 for data symbol group #2 for which the carrier is interleaved. Note that carrier interleaving is described below.

Similar processing continues.

[1284] The carrier interleaver 8600-01-N for data symbol group #N receives inputs of signal 8200-07-N for data symbol group #N obtained as a result of data conversion and control signal 8200-00. The carrier interleaver 8600-01-N interleaves the carrier for the 8200-07-N signal for group #N of data symbols obtained as a data conversion result based on the information regarding the carrier interleaving method included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the signal 8600-02-N for group #N of data symbols for which the carrier is interleaved. Note that carrier interleaving is described below.

[1285] It should be noted that the processing for parts other than this part is as described with reference to FIG. 1 and 82, and therefore its description is omitted. In addition, the configurations illustrated in FIG. 1 and 86 are examples of device configurations, and as such, the present disclosure is not limited to the configurations.

[1286] An example of another base station (AP) configuration is described below.

[1287] Another base station (AP) configuration is the configuration in FIG. 76, in which the data symbol group generator 7600-00 and the frame configuration module 7600-01 are replaced by the data symbol group generator and the frame configuration module in FIG. 87.

[1288] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 87, which operate identically to the elements in FIG. 58, 76, 82, and 86, and description of such elements is omitted (thus, description of FIG. 87 is omitted).

[1289] It should be noted that FIG. 76 and 87 illustrate device configuration examples, and the present disclosure is not limited to such configurations.

[1290] The following describes with reference to FIG. 88, example of carrier interleaving operation by carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 for data symbol group #1, carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and carrier interleaver 8600-01-N for group #N of data symbols in FIG. 86 and 87.

[1291] Part (a) in FIG. 88 illustrates an example of a symbol configuration for a group of data symbols before carrier interleaving, in which the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). As illustrated in (a) of FIG. 88, the characters on carrier $1 are referred to as the "first character column", the characters on carrier $2 are referred to as the "second character column", the characters on carrier $3 are referred to as the "third character column", the characters on carrier $4 are referred to as the "fourth character column", the characters on carrier $5 are referred to as the "fifth character column", the characters on carrier $6 are referred to as the "sixth character column", and the characters on carrier $7 are referred to as the "seventh character column". Thus, the data symbol group includes the first to seventh symbol columns.

[1292] Part (b) of FIG. 88 illustrates an example of a symbol configuration for a group of data symbols after carrier interleaving.

[1293] As illustrated in (a) and (b) of FIG. 88, the first symbol column arranged on carrier $1 before carrier interleaving is arranged on carrier $4 after carrier interleaving.

[1294] The second symbol column, arranged on carrier $2 before carrier interleaving, is arranged on carrier $6 after carrier interleaving.

[1295] The third symbol column, arranged on carrier $3 before carrier interleaving, is arranged on carrier $5 after carrier interleaving.

[1296] The fourth symbol column, arranged on carrier $4 before carrier interleaving, is arranged on carrier $2 after carrier interleaving.

[1297] The fifth symbol column, arranged on carrier $5 before carrier interleaving, is arranged on carrier $7 after carrier interleaving.

[1298] The sixth symbol column arranged on carrier $6 before carrier interleaving is arranged on carrier $1 after carrier interleaving.

[1299] The seventh symbol column arranged on carrier $7 before carrier interleaving is arranged on carrier $3 after carrier interleaving.

[1300] As shown by the example above, the carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 for data symbol group #1, the carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbol group #2,..., and the module 8600-01-N carrier interleaving for the #N data symbol group changes the carrier positions of the symbol columns. It should be noted that the carrier interleaving in FIG. 88 is a simple example, and the carrier interleaving method is not limited to this.

[1301] As described above, the data symbols are arranged so as to increase the time and frequency diversity gains by carrier interleaving, and thus, the advantage of improving the quality of data received by the receiver can be obtained.

[1302] As a configuration of a base station (AP) that operates identically to a base station (AP) having the configuration in FIG. 1, in which the data generator 102 and the frame configuration module 110 are replaced by the elements in FIG. 86 may accommodate the configuration of FIG. 1, in which the data generator 102 and the frame configuration module 110 are replaced by the elements in FIG. 89.

[1303] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 89, which operate identically to the elements in FIG. 1 and 82, and description of such elements is omitted.

[1304] The carrier interleaver 8900-01-1 receives baseband (quadrature) signal inputs 8201_1 for stream 1 and control signal 8200-00. The carrier interleaver 8900-01-1 interleaves the carriers (see FIG. 88) based on the carrier interleaving information included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the baseband signal 8900-02-1 obtained as a result of the interleaving. bearing.

[1305] Similarly, the carrier interleaver 8900-01-2 receives baseband (quadrature) signal 8201_2 inputs for stream 2 and control signal 8200-00. The carrier interleaver 8900-01-2 interleaves the carriers (see FIG. 88) based on the carrier interleaving information included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the baseband signal 8900-02-2 obtained as a result of the interleaving. bearing.

[1306] Accordingly, signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 receives an input of the baseband signal 8900-02-1 obtained as a result of carrier interleaving instead of the (quadrature) baseband signal 111_1 for stream 1, and receives the input of the baseband signal 8900-02-2 obtained as a result of carrier interleaving, instead of the baseband (quadrature) signal 111_2 for stream 2.

[1307] FIG. 76 as a configuration of a base station (AP) that operates identical to the base station (AP) having the configuration in FIG. 76, in which the data symbol group generator 7600-00 and the frame configuration module 7600-01 are replaced by the elements in FIG. 87 may accommodate the configuration of FIG. 76, in which the data symbol group generator 7600-00 and the frame configuration module 7600-01 are replaced by the elements in FIG. 90.

[1308] Identical reference numbers are assigned to the elements in FIG. 90, which operate identically to the elements in FIG. 58, 76 and 82, and description of such elements is omitted.

[1309] The carrier interleaver 9000-01 receives the inputs of the modulated signal 7600-02 and the control signal 8200-00, interleaves the carriers (see FIG. 88) based on the carrier interleaving information included in the control signal 8200-00, and outputs the signal 9000-02 baseband obtained as a result of carrier interleaving.

[1310] Accordingly, radio module 5816 in FIG. 76 receives an input of the baseband signal 9000-02 obtained as a result of carrier interleaving instead of the modulated signal 7600-02.

[1311] The description of a method for inserting some dummy symbols or dummy data into a group of data symbols has been completed above. The dummy symbols or dummy data are inserted in such a way that the receiver easily sorts the data symbols and demodulates and decodes the data symbols, and moreover, the advantage of preventing data rate drop due to dummy symbols or dummy data can be obtained. It may be advantageous that one or more groups of data symbols can be efficiently transmitted, or in other words, the transmission rate can be set for each group of data symbols.

[1312] Additional note 2

The second exemplary embodiment is described separately for specifying a carrier interval (subcarrier) when groups of data symbols are subjected to frequency division multiplexing, and a carrier interval (subcarrier) when groups of data symbols are subjected to time division multiplexing or not subjected to frequency division multiplexing. . Of course, this is applicable to exemplary embodiments C and D.

[1313] For example, in FIG. 79, carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2 data symbols, group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900- 03 data symbols and group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols, and the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols is transmitted may be identical or may be different . It should be noted that FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "identical".

[1314] It should be noted that FIG. 91 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "different". It should be noted that the timeslot for the time period during which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 are transmitted data symbols and the data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, and the time period for which the data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted are identical. It should be noted that the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900- 03 data symbols and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, and the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted may be identical or may be different. In FIG. 91, the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period during which group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data symbols, group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2 data symbols, group #FD3 (#TFD3) are transmitted 7900-03 data symbols and group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols is 64, while the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period during which group #TD10 (#TFD10) is transmitted is 7900-10 symbols data is 256.

[1315] Similarly, in FIG. 79, carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2 data symbols, group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900- 03 data symbols and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, and the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which the first preamble (or second preamble) is transmitted may be the same or may be different. It should be noted that FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "identical".

[1316] It should be noted that FIG. 91 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "different". However, the timeslot for the time period during which group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data symbols, group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 data symbols, group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 symbols are transmitted data and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, and the timeslot for the time period during which the first preamble (or second preamble) is transmitted are identical. It should be noted that the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900- 03 data symbols and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, and the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which the first preamble (or second preamble) is transmitted may be identical or may be different. In FIG. 91, the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period during which group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data symbols, group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 data symbols, group #FD3 (#TFD3) are transmitted 7900-03 data symbols and group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols is 64, while the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period during which the first preamble (or second preamble) is transmitted is 256.

[1317] FIG. 79, the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which the second preamble is transmitted may be different.

[1318] It should be noted that FIG. 92 illustrates an example where carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "different". It should be noted that the timeslot for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the timeslot for the time period during which the second preamble is transmitted are identical. However, the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which the second preamble is transmitted may be identical or may be different. In FIG. 92, the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted is 64, while the number of carriers (subcarriers) present during the time period during which the second preamble is transmitted is 256.

[1319] FIG. 79, the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the carrier (subcarrier) interval for the time period during which the data symbol group #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted may be different.

[1320] It should be noted that FIG. 93 illustrates an example where carrier (subcarrier) intervals are "different". It should be noted that the timeslot for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the timeslot for the time period during which the group #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols are transmitted are identical. It should be noted that the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which the first preamble is transmitted and the occupied bandwidth for the time period during which the data symbol group #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols are transmitted may be the same or may be different. In FIG. 93, the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period in which the first preamble is transmitted is 64, while the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in the time period in which the group #TFD10 (#TFD10) is transmitted 7900-10 data characters is 256.

[1321] It should be noted that the above description of the additional note is given using the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 as an example, but the applicable frame configuration is not limited to this. The exemplary embodiment to be combined with the second exemplary embodiment is not limited to Exemplary Embodiment C and Exemplary Embodiment D. When the second exemplary embodiment is combined with exemplary embodiment C or with exemplary embodiment D, the above description of the additional note is applied to the combination, and in addition, terminals are allocated to data symbols, and dummy symbols (or dummy data) are added to the data symbols.

[1322] In this detailed description, possible examples of data included in the data symbol group include a data packet, an image information packet, an audio information packet, a video or still picture information packet, a data stream, an image stream, an audio stream, and a video stream. or still image. The type or configuration of the data included in the data character group is not limited as indicated.

[1323] For example, a case is described in which a base station (or, for example, an access point (AP)) transmits a modulated signal indicated by frame configurations based on the time and frequency axes described in this detailed description, for example, the axes illustrated , for example, in Fig. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, 65 and 79; However, an exemplary embodiment in which different terminals transmit groups of data symbols in a frame configuration based on the time and frequency axes described in this detailed description is possible. This aspect is described next. The frame configuration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in the above drawings.

[1324] For example, the following configuration may be adapted.

[1325] For example, a case is described in which a base station (or, for example, an access point (AP)) transmits a modulated signal indicated by frame configurations based on the time and frequency axes described in this detailed description, for example, the axes illustrated , for example, in Fig. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, 65 and 79; However, an exemplary embodiment in which different terminals transmit groups of data symbols in a frame configuration based on the time and frequency axes described in this detailed description is possible. This aspect is described next. The frame configuration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in the above drawings.

[1326] The following describes a modulated signal transmission method used by a plurality of terminals based on the frame configuration in FIG. 94.

[1327] FIG. 94, data character group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is transmitted by terminal #1.

[1328] Data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is transmitted by terminal #2. Data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is transmitted by terminal #3. Data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is transmitted by terminal #4. Data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is transmitted by terminal #5. Data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is transmitted by terminal #6. Data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is transmitted by terminal #7. Data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is transmitted by terminal #8. Data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is transmitted by terminal #9. Group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols is transmitted by terminal #10. Group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 data symbols is transmitted by terminal #11.

[1329] FIG. 95 illustrates the communication status between the base station (AP) and terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, terminal #4, terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, terminal #9, terminal #10 and terminal #11. Part (a) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal, (b) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, and terminal #4 are transmitting a modulated signal, (c) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, and terminal #9 are transmitting a modulated signal, (d) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which terminal #10 transmits a modulated signal, and (e) in FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which terminal #11 transmits a modulated signal.

[1330] As illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs "character transmission" 9500-01. For example, control information and data symbols are transmitted by "character transmission" 9500-01. At this time, the control information includes information regarding the terminal to transmit the modulated signal in the period from the time t1 to the time t2 in FIG. 122 (and information regarding frequency allocation or carrier allocation for the terminal).

[1331] As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, and terminal #4 receive a "character" 9500-01 transmitted by a base station (AP) and perform "character transmission" 9500-02.

[1332] At this time, terminal #1 transmits data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #2 transmits data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #3 transmits data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 as illustrated in FIG. 94, and terminal #4 transmits data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 as illustrated in FIG. 94.

[1333] Then, as illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs "character transmission" 9500-03. For example, control information and data symbols are transmitted by "character transmission" 9500-03. At this time, the control information includes information regarding the terminal to transmit the modulated signal in the period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 94 (and information regarding frequency allocation or carrier assignment for the terminal).

[1334] As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, and terminal #9 receive the “symbol” 9500-03 transmitted by the base station (AP) and perform “symbol transmission” 9500-04.

[1335] At this time, terminal #5 transmits data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #6 transmits data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #7 transmits data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #8 transmits data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 as illustrated in FIG. 94, and terminal #9 transmits data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 as illustrated in FIG. 94.

[1336] As illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs "character transmission" 9500-05. For example, control information and data symbols are transmitted by "character transmission" 9500-05. At this time, the control information includes information regarding the terminal to transmit the modulated signal in the period from time t5 to time t6 in FIG. 94 (and information regarding terminal timing).

[1337] As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #10 and terminal #11 receive "character" 9500-05 transmitted by the base station (AP), and terminal #10 and terminal #11 perform "character transmission" 9500-06 and "character transmission" 9500-07, respectively.

[1338] At this time, terminal #10 transmits group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data symbols, as illustrated in FIG. 94, and terminal #11 transmits data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 as illustrated in FIG. 94.

[1339] FIG. 96 illustrates an example configuration of data character group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 data character group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 data character group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 data character group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data characters group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters group #FD8 (# TFD8) 7900-08 data characters, group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data characters, group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data characters and group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 data characters when terminal # 1, terminal #2, terminal #3, terminal #4, terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, terminal #9, terminal #10 and terminal #11 transmit group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900 -01 data characters, #FD2 group (#TFD2) 7900-02 data characters, #FD3 group (#TFD3) 7900-03 data characters, #FD4 group (#TFD4) 7900-04 data characters, #FD5 group (#TFD5) ) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 character group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data characters, group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data characters, group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 data characters, and group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900 -11 data characters, respectively. It should be noted that in FIG. 96, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier).

[1340] As illustrated in FIG. 96, each group of data symbols includes, for example, a third preamble 9600-01, a fourth preamble 9600-02, and data symbols 9600-03.

[1341] For example, the third preamble 9600-01 includes a PSK symbol (known to the transmitter and receiver) for signal detection, time synchronization and frequency synchronization, and the fourth preamble 9600-02 includes an automatic gain control (AGC) symbol for a receiver to perform AGC, a pilot symbol (reference symbol) for a receiver to perform channel estimation, terminal information for a base station (AP) to identify a terminal, and, for example, a control information symbol for transmitting information about the symbol modulation method 9600-03 data and error-correcting code for 9600-03 data symbols.

[1342] Data symbols 9600-03 include data to be transmitted by a terminal to a base station (AP).

[1343] It should be noted that the arrangement of the third preamble 9600-01, the fourth preamble 9600-02, and the data symbols along the time and frequency axes is not limited to the arrangement in FIG. 96 and, for example, the third preamble and the fourth preamble may be arranged on specific carriers.

[1344] The frame configurations described in this detailed description based on the time and frequency axes, such as the axes illustrated, for example, in FIG. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, 65, and 79 may be a frame configuration in which the transmission method is a SISO (or SIMO) method, a frame configuration in which the transmission method is a MISO method, or a frame configuration in which the transmission method is a MIMO method. It should be noted that this applies to all frames of all exemplary embodiments. Frame configurations are not limited to those illustrated in the above drawings.

[1345] In addition, in this detailed description, a description is given using the OFDM method as an example, but the part of the description in which the OFDM method is performed can be achieved identically even if a transmission method using multiple bearing.

[1346] Exemplary Embodiment E

The present exemplary embodiment describes a specific example in the case where the base station (AP) transmits the modulated signal indicated by the frame configuration in FIG. 79 as described in Exemplary Embodiments C and D.

[1347] Exemplary embodiment D describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted into data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, a data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 and a data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 present in the period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 79, while the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into groups of data symbols.

[1348] FIG. 97 shows an example configuration of data character group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data character group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data character group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data character group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 of data symbols present in the period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 79 when dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data symbol groups.

[1349] At least one of data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and group # FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols present in the period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 79 includes blank symbols 9700-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 97. FIG. 97 illustrates an example of a data symbol group configuration in the period from time t1 to time t2 when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 97, 9700-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits data using the symbols.

[1350] 9700-02 in FIG. 97 denotes empty characters (or empty slots), and the base station (AP) does not transmit data using characters. Thus, the symbols are not present in the empty symbols 9700-02 (empty time slots), i.e. the modulated signal is not present in the time section and frequency section, which occupy empty 9700-02 symbols (blank time slices).

[1351] FIG. 98 illustrates an example in which when a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 79, when one of the data character group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, the data character group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, the data character group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 and the data character group #FD4 (#TFD4 ) 7900-04 of data symbols present in the period from time t1 to time t2 includes "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9700-02 is generated as illustrated in FIG. 97, the base station (AP) transmits another set of data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9700-02.

[1352] FIG. 98, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier) and the horizontal axis indicates time. An identical reference number is assigned to the data symbol, which operates identically to the data symbol in FIG. 97, and the description of such a data symbol is omitted. The base station (AP) transmits another data symbol using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9700-02 in FIG. 97.

[1353] FIG. 98, 9800-01 is a preamble, and 9800-02 is a data symbol group #A, and preamble 9800-01 and data symbol group #A (9800-02) are, for example, symbols (groups of symbols) for data transmission to the new terminal #A.

[1354] For example, preamble 9800-01 includes symbols for terminal #A to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and also includes control information symbols used to form data symbol group #A, for example, information regarding an error correction coding method, information regarding a modulated signal, and information regarding a transmission method, and terminal #A can demodulate and decode data symbol group #A by obtaining control information.

[1355] Exemplary embodiment D describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted into data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in the period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. . 79 However, the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data character groups.

[1356] FIG. 99 illustrates an example configuration of group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 79 when dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data symbol groups.

[1357] At least one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data symbol group # FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present in the period of time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 79 includes blank symbols 9900-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 99.

[1358] FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a data symbol group configuration in the period from time t1 to time t2 when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 99, 9900-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits data using the symbols.

[1359] 9900-02 in FIG. 99 denotes blank characters (or blank slots), and the base station (AP) does not transmit data using blank characters. Thus, the symbols are not present in the empty symbols 9900-02 (empty time slots), i.e. the modulated signal is not present in the time section and frequency section, which occupy empty symbols 9900-02 (blank time slots).

[1360] FIG. 100 illustrates an example in which when a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 79, when one of group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (#TFD8 ) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present in the period from time t3 to time t4 includes "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02 as illustrated in FIG. . 99, the base station (AP) transmits another set of data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02.

[1361] FIG. 100, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier) and the horizontal axis indicates time. An identical reference number is assigned to the data symbol, which operates identically to the data symbol in FIG. 99, and the description of such a data symbol is omitted. The base station (AP) transmits other data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02 in FIG. 99.

[1362] FIG. 100, 10000-01 denotes a preamble, 10000-02 denotes data symbol group #B, and preamble 10000-01 and data symbol group #B (10000-02) are, for example, symbols (groups of symbols) for transmitting data to a new terminal #B.

[1363] For example, preamble 10000-01 includes symbols for terminal #B to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and also includes control information symbols used to form data symbol group #B, to for example, information regarding an error correction coding method, information regarding a modulated signal, and information regarding a transmission method, and terminal #B can demodulate and decode data symbol group #B by obtaining control information.

[1364] The first preambles and the second preambles are present, and the data symbol groups are subjected to frequency division in the period from time t1 to time t2 and the period from time t3 to time t4, as illustrated in FIG. 79. Then, if the base station (AP) transmits data symbols, the frequency division-divisioned data symbol groups should include "blank symbols (blank slots)".

[1365] As described with reference to FIG. 98 and 100, a base station (AP) transmits groups of data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)", whereby a transmission efficiency improvement advantage can be obtained in a system that includes a base station (AP) and a terminal. At this time, although the preambles are transmitted in FIG. 98 and 100, the addition of blank characters provides the advantage that a (new) terminal can recognize that a group of data characters is present. In addition, the base station (AP) transmits, for example, a preamble and a group of data symbols, as illustrated in FIG. 98 and 100, whereby data symbol interference can be prevented, i. e. multiple data symbols are not allowed to be present at the same time and on the same frequency.

[1366] It should be noted that the application to time-divisioned data symbol groups (or the case in which the data symbol groups are arranged such that there is no time at which two or more data symbol groups are present) is described below, FIG. . 79.

[1367] Exemplary embodiment D describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted into data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 on fig. 79, while the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into groups of data symbols.

[1368] Data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG. 79 include blank symbols 10100-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 101. FIG. 101 illustrates a configuration example of data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 101, 10100-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits data using the data symbols.

[1369] 10100-02 in FIG. 101 denotes blank characters (or blank slots), and the base station (AP) does not transmit data using blank characters. Thus, the symbols are not present in the empty symbols 10100-02 (empty time slices), i.e. the modulated signal is not present in the time section and frequency section, which occupy empty symbols 10100-02 (blank time slices).

[1370] A distinctive aspect in FIG. 101 is that an empty symbol (an empty time slice) is not present in the set of time sections. For example, the data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 in FIG. 79 is brought to the state as illustrated in FIG. 101. At this time, blank symbols 10100-02 (blank slots) are present only at the time "*50" as illustrated in FIG. 101.

[1371] Even if the new data symbol group is transmitted in the state illustrated in FIG. 101, it is difficult to significantly improve the transmission efficiency. In addition, it is also difficult to transmit a preamble and a group of data symbols at different times.

[1372] Accordingly, when data symbol groups are time-divisioned (or data symbol groups are arranged such that there is no time at which two or more data symbol groups are present), a configuration should be applied in which a new "preamble and symbol group" is transmitted. data". It should be noted that a configuration in which a new "preamble and data character set" is transmitted may be used.

[1373] As described above, by new transmission of (preamble and) data symbol group, using "blank symbol (blank slot)" in the data symbol group, the advantage of improving data transmission efficiency can be obtained in a system that includes a base station (AP) and terminal.

[1374] Next, another example is described in the case where the base station (AP) transmits the modulated signal indicated by the frame configuration in FIG. 79 as described in Exemplary Embodiments C and D.

[1375] FIG. 102 illustrates an example of a different frame configuration that a base station (AP) transmits and is different from the configuration in FIG. 79. Identical reference numbers are assigned to elements that operate identically to the elements in FIG. 2 and 79, and description of such elements is omitted.

[1376] The difference between the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102 from the configuration in FIG. 79 is that the third preamble is inserted into the frame between the time t2 and the time t3.

[1377] Exemplary embodiment D describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted into data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in the period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. . 102, while the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data symbol groups.

[1378] FIG. 99 illustrates an example configuration of group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 102 when dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data symbol groups.

[1379] At least one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data symbol group # FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present in the period of time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 102 includes blank symbols 9900-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 99.

[1380] FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a data symbol group configuration in the period from time t3 to time t4 when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 99, 9900-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits data using the data symbols.

[1381] 9900-02 in FIG. 99 denotes blank characters (or blank slots), and the base station (AP) does not transmit data using blank characters. Thus, the symbols are not present in the empty symbols 9900-02 (empty time slots), i.e. the modulated signal is not present in the time section and frequency section, which occupy empty symbols 9900-02 (blank time slots).

[1382] FIG. 103 illustrates an example in which when a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 102, and when one of group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 data characters, group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 data characters, group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 data characters, group #FD8 (# TFD8) 7900-08 data symbols and group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 data symbols present from time t3 to time t4 includes "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02 as illustrated in fig. 99, the base station (AP) transmits another set of data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02.

[1383] FIG. 103, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier) and the horizontal axis indicates time, and an identical reference with a number is assigned to a data symbol, which operates identically to the data symbol in FIG. 99, and the description of such a data symbol is omitted. The base station (AP) transmits other data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" 9900-02 in FIG. 99.

[1384] FIG. 103, 10300-01 denotes data character group #A, and data character group #B (10300-01) includes characters (is a character group), for example, for transmitting data to a new terminal #B.

[1385] For example, the third preamble 10200-01 in FIG. 102 includes symbols for terminal #B to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and control information symbols used to form data symbol group #B, such as information regarding an error correction coding method, information regarding the modulated signal, information regarding the transmission method, and the position of the time and frequency position in which group #B of data symbols is present. Thus, the terminal #B can demodulate and decode the data symbol group #B by obtaining the control information.

[1386] It should be noted that in FIG. 102, the third preamble is inserted between the time t2 and the time t3, but the third preamble may be inserted between the time t0 and the time t1. At this time, for example, at least one of the data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, the data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, the data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and the #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 data symbols present in the period of time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 102 includes blank symbols 9900-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 99 and data symbol group #B may be transmitted using blank symbols 9900-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 103.

[1387] The following describes the application to time-divisioned data symbol groups (or the case in which the data symbol groups are arranged such that there is no time at which two or more data symbol groups are present), FIG. 102.

[1388] Exemplary embodiment D describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted into data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 on fig. 102, while the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted into data symbol groups.

[1389] Data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG. 102 include blank symbols 10100-02 (blank slots) as illustrated in FIG. 101. FIG. 101 illustrates a configuration example of data symbol group #10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 101, 10100-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits data using the data symbols.

[1390] 10100-02 in FIG. 101 denotes blank characters (or blank slots), and the base station (AP) does not transmit data using blank characters. Thus, the symbols are not present in the empty symbols 10100-02 (empty time slices), i.e. the modulated signal is not present in the time section and frequency section, which occupy empty symbols 10100-02 (blank time slices).

[1391] A distinctive aspect in FIG. 101 is that an empty symbol (an empty time slice) is not present in the set of time sections. For example, the data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 in FIG. 79 is brought to the state as illustrated in FIG. 101. At this time, as illustrated in FIG. 101, blank characters 10100-02 (blank time slices) are present only at the time of "*50".

[1392] If a new data symbol group is transmitted in the state of FIG. 101, the data transmission efficiency is improved, although the improvement should not be achieved to a great extent. For example, if the usage does not involve high speed data transmission, 10100-02 blank symbols (blank slots) can be effectively used for data transmission.

[1393] At this time, the third preamble 10400-01 is inserted between the time t4 and the time t5, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (Note that in FIG. 104, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and identical reference numbers are assigned to elements that operate identically to the elements in FIG. 79, and description of such elements is omitted). As illustrated in FIG. 105, data symbol group #C (10500-01) is transmitted using blank symbols 10100-02 (blank slots) illustrated in FIG. 101 (Note that in FIG. 105, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and an identical reference with a number is assigned to an element that operates identically to the element in FIG. 101, and description of such an element is omitted).

[1394] FIG. 105, data character group #C (10500-01) includes characters (is a character group), for example, for transmitting data to a new terminal #C.

[1395] For example, the third preamble 10400-01 in FIG. 104 includes symbols for terminal #C to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation, and control information symbols used to form data symbol group #C, such as information regarding an error correction coding method, information regarding the modulated signal, information regarding the transmission method, and the position of time and frequency position in which group #C of data symbols is present. Thus, terminal #C can demodulate and decode group #C of data symbols by obtaining control information.

[1396] It should be noted that the frame configuration can be adapted as illustrated in FIG. 105, in which group #C (10500-01) of data characters is not transmitted.

[1397] As described above, by retransmitting a group of data symbols using "blank symbols (blank slots)" in the group of data symbols, the advantage of improving data transmission efficiency can be obtained in a system that includes a base station (AP) and a terminal .

[1398] It should be noted that the transmission methods in FIG. 100 and 102 are transmission methods for the (new) data symbol group and preamble, but the base station (AP) may transmit the data symbol group and preamble using any of the transmission methods. Depending on the communication state, the base station (AP) may switch between transmission methods in FIG. 100 and 102 and may transmit a group of data symbols and a preamble. It should be noted that the base station (AP) may determine whether or not to switch between the transmission methods in FIG. 100 and 102, or a base station (AP) may switch between transmission methods according to a designation from a terminal communicating with the base station (AP).

[1399] Additional note 3

Exemplary embodiments C and D, for example, describe a method in which a base station (AP) inserts a dummy symbol into a group of data symbols, and exemplary embodiment C describes a method in which a base station (AP) assembles a blank symbol (blank slot) in a group of data characters. At this time, for each frame, the base station (AP) may switch between the method of inserting a dummy symbol in the data symbol group and the method of arranging a null symbol (blank slot) in the data symbol group, and use the switched method.

[1400] This specification describes the case of setting "carrier interval" as an example of setting "FFT size or Fourier transform size", but the present disclosure is not limited thereto, and "number of subcarriers used for OFDM modulated signal" may be specified by specifying the "FFT size or Fourier transform size".

[1401] For example, changing the "FFT size or Fourier transform size" means changing the "number of subcarriers used for the OFDM modulated signal".

[1402] Various frame configurations are described in this detailed description. The base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal having the frame configuration described in this detailed description using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method. At this time, when a terminal communicating with a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal, the modulated signal transmitted by the terminal can be based on a single carrier method (the base station (AP) can simultaneously transmit groups of data symbols to a plurality of terminals using the OFDM method, and the terminal can reduce power consumption by using the single carrier method).

[1403] A time division duplexing (TDD) method may be applied in which a terminal transmits a modulating signal using a portion of the bandwidth used for the modulated signal transmitted by the base station (AP).

[1404] This detailed description explains the operation and configurations of a base station (AP) and a terminal. For example, FIG. 74 illustrates a base station (AP) configuration example, and FIG. 75 illustrates a terminal configuration. The number of transmit antennas is one and the number of receive antennas is one in FIG. 74, but as described in this detailed description, the MIMO transmission method and/or the MISO method can be applied as the transmission method, and therefore, the number of transmission antennas is not limited to one, but may be two or more, and in addition , the number of receiving antennas is not limited to one and may be two or more. Similarly, the number of transmit antennas is one and the number of receive antennas is one in FIG. 75, but as described in this detailed description, the MIMO transmission method and/or the MISO method can be applied as the transmission method, and therefore, the number of transmission antennas is not limited to one and may be two or more, and in addition , the number of receiving antennas is not limited to one and may be two or more.

[1405] FIG. 74 and 75 illustrate transmit antenna 7400-04, receive antenna 7400-05, transmit antenna 7500-04, and receive antenna 7500-05, but transmit antennas 7400-04 and 7500-04 may include multiple antennas 7500-05, and receive antennas 7400-05 and 7500-05 may include multiple antennas. The following is a further description regarding these aspects.

[1406] FIG. 106, for example, illustrates an example configuration of the 7400-04 and 7500-04 transmit antennas.

[1407] The separation module 10600-02 receives the input of the transmitted signal 10600-01. The splitter 10600-02 separates the transmitted signal 10600-01 and outputs the transmitted signals 10600-03_1, 10600-03_2, 10600-03_3 and 10600-03_4.

[1408] The multiplication module 10600-04_1 receives the inputs of the transmitted signal 10600-03_1 and the control signal 10600-00. Based on the multiplier factor information included in the control signal 10600-00, the multiplier 10600-04_1 multiplies the transmitted signal 10600-03_1 by the multiplier factor and outputs the signal 10600-05_1 obtained as the result of the multiplication and the signal 10600-05_1 received in as the result of the multiplication, is output from the antenna 10600-06_1 as a radio wave.

[1409] When the transmitted signal 10600-03_1 is denoted by T x 1(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by W1, the signal 10600-05_1 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be represented by T x 1(t) xW1. W1 may be specified by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1410] The multiplication module 10600-04_2 receives inputs of the transmitted signal 10600-03_2 and the control signal 10600-00. Based on the multiplier factor information included in control signal 10600-00, the multiplier 10600-04_2 multiplies the transmitted signal 10600-03_2 by the multiplier factor, and outputs signal 10600-05_2 as the result of the multiplication, and signal 10600-05_2 received as the result multiplication is output from the antenna 10600-06_2 as a radio wave.

[1411] When the transmitted signal 10600-03_2 is denoted by T x 2(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by W2, the signal 10600-05_2 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be represented by T x 2(t) xW2. W2 can be given by a complex number and therefore can be a real number.

[1412] The multiplication module 10600-04_3 receives the inputs of the transmitted signal 10600-03_3 and the control signal 10600-00. Based on the multiplier factor information included in the control signal 10600-00, the multiplier 10600-04_3 multiplies the transmitted signal 10600-03_3 by the multiplier factor and outputs the signal 10600-05_3 obtained as the result of the multiplication and the signal 10600-05_3 received in as the result of the multiplication, is output from the antenna 10600-06_3 as a radio wave.

[1413] When the transmitted signal 10600-03_3 is denoted by T x 3(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by W3, the signal 10600-05_3 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be represented by T x 3(t) xW3. W3 may be given by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1414] The multiplication module 10600-04_4 receives inputs of the transmitted signal 10600-03_4 and the control signal 10600-00. Based on the multiplier factor information included in control signal 10600-00, the multiplier 10600-04_4 multiplies the transmitted signal 10600-03_4 by the multiplier factor, and outputs signal 10600-05_4 as the result of the multiplication and signal 10600-05_4 as the result. multiplication output from antenna 10600-06_4 as a radio wave.

[1415] When the transmitted signal 10600-03_4 is denoted by T x 4(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by W4, the signal 10600-05_4 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be expressed by T x 4(t) xW4. W4 may be specified by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1416] It should be noted that the following "W1 absolute value, W2 absolute value, W3 absolute value, and W4 absolute value are identical" can be satisfied. In this case, it corresponds to the state in which the phase is changed. Of course, the absolute value of W1, the absolute value of W2, the absolute value of W3, and the absolute value of W4 may not be identical.

[1417] FIG. 106 illustrates an example where each antenna includes four antennas (and four multipliers), but the number of antennas is not limited to 4 and may include two or more antennas.

[1418] FIG. 107, for example, illustrates an example configuration of the 7400-05 and 7500-05 receive antennas.

[1419] The multiplication module 10700-03_1 receives inputs of the received signal 10700-02_1 received by the antenna 10700-01_1 and the control signal 10700-00. Based on the multiplier factor information included in the control signal 10700-00, the multiplier 10700-03_1 multiplies the received signal 10700-02_1 by the multiplier factor and outputs the 10700-04_1 signal obtained as the result of the multiplication.

[1420] When the received signal 10700-02_1 is denoted by R x 1(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by D1, the signal 10700-04_1 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be expressed by R x 1(t) xD1. D1 may be specified by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1421] The multiplication module 10700-03_2 receives received signal inputs 10700-02_2 received via antenna 10700-01_2 and control signal 10700-00. Based on the multiplication factor information included in the control signal 10700-00, the multiplier 10700-03_2 multiplies the received signal 10700-02_2 by the multiplier and outputs the 10700-04_2 signal obtained as the result of the multiplication.

[1422] When the received signal 10700-02_2 is denoted by R x 2(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by D2, the signal 10700-04_2 as a multiplication result can be expressed by R x 2(t) x D2. D2 may be given by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1423] The multiplication module 10700-03_3 receives received signal inputs 10700-02_3 received via antenna 10700-01_3 and control signal 10700-00. Based on the multiplication factor information included in the control signal 10700-00, the multiplier 10700-03_3 multiplies the received signal 10700-02_3 by the multiplier and outputs the 10700-04_3 signal obtained as the result of the multiplication.

[1424] When the received signal 10700-02_3 is denoted by R x 3(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by D3, the signal 10700-04_3 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be expressed by R x 3(t) xD3. D3 may be specified by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1425] The multiplication module 10700-03_4 receives received signal inputs 10700-02_4 received via antenna 10700-01_4 and control signal 10700-00. Based on the multiplication factor information included in the control signal 10700-00, the multiplier 10700-03_4 multiplies the received signal 10700-02_4 by the multiplier and outputs the 10700-04_4 signal obtained as the result of the multiplication.

[1426] When the received signal 10700-02_4 is denoted by R x 4(t) (t: time), and the multiplication factor is denoted by D4, the signal 10700-04_4 obtained as the result of the multiplication may be expressed by R x 4(t) xD4. D4 may be specified by a complex number and therefore may be a real number.

[1427] The combining unit 10700-05 combines the signals 10700-04_1, 10700-04_2, 10700-04_3, and 10700-04_4 obtained as the result of the multiplication, and outputs the combined signal 10700-06. It should be noted that the combined signal 10700-06 can be expressed by R x 1(t) x D1+R x 2(t) x D2+R x 3(t) x D3+R x 4(t) x D4.

[1428] FIG. 107 illustrates an example where each antenna includes four antennas (and four multipliers), but the number of antennas is not limited to four and may include two or more antennas.

Industrial Applicability

[1429] The present disclosure is broadly applicable to a wireless system that transmits various modulated signals from multiple antennas, respectively. In addition, the present disclosure is also applicable to a case in which MIMO transmission is performed in a wired communication system having a plurality of transmission parts (for example, in a PLC (Power Line Communication) system, in an optical communication system, and in a DSL system ( digital subscriber line)).

References with numbers in drawings

[1430] 102 - data shaper

105 - second preamble generator

108 - driver control signals

110 - frame configuration module

112 - signal processor

114 - Pilot Insertion Module

116 - IFFT module

118 - PAPR reduction module

120 - guard interval insertion module

122 - first preamble inserter

124 - wireless communication processor

126 - antenna.

Claims (46)

1. A transmission method, comprising: forming a preamble, a first subframe, and a second subframe such that the first subframe is provided between the preamble and the second subframe in the time direction, the preamble carrying control information, the first subframe being formed by mapping the first modulated signals of the first physical layer pipeline (PLP) and the second modulated signals of the second PLP into time-frequency resources, wherein the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP into time-frequency resources; inserting pilot signals into the preamble, the first subframe and the second subframe; performing inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) processing on the preamble, the first subframe, and the second subframe to generate an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal after pilot insertion; and transmission of the OFDM signal, while the time-frequency resources in the first subframe include first resources and second resources that are allocated for the first OFDM symbol and the second OFDM symbol, respectively, wherein the first resources are mapped in the frequency direction and correspond to the corresponding OFDM subcarriers, the second resources are mapped in the direction frequencies and correspond to the respective OFDM subcarriers, the first resources being contiguous with the second resources in the time direction, the first modulated signals include a first sequence of first modulated signals and a second sequence of first modulated signals following the first sequence, the first sequence is mapped to the first resources within the first band in the frequency direction, from the first starting position, the second sequence is mapped to second resources within said first range, the second modulated signals including a third sequence of second modulated signals and a fourth sequence of second modulated signals following the third sequence, the third sequence is mapped to the first resources within the second band in the frequency direction, from the second starting position, the fourth sequence is mapped to second resources within said second range, the sequence of third modulated signals is mapped to time-frequency resources in the second subframe from the third starting position, and the control information includes a first start position, a second start position, and a third start position. 2. The transmission method according to claim 1, in which the first starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the first band, and the second starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the second band. 3. The transmission method according to claim 1, wherein the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP and the fourth modulated signals of the fourth PLP into time-frequency resources such that the third PLP and the fourth PLP are multiplexed into the second subframe. 4. Method of administration, comprising: receiving an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal; and demodulating the received OFDM signal to obtain data from at least one of the first physical layer pipeline (PLP), the second PLP, or the third PLP, wherein The OFDM signal is generated by: inserting pilot signals into the preamble, the first subframe, and the second subframe such that the first subframe is provided between the preamble and the second subframe in the time direction; and then performing inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) processing on the preamble, the first subframe, and the second subframe, the preamble carrying control information, wherein the first subframe is formed by mapping the first modulated signals of the first PLP and the second modulated signals of the second PLP to time-frequency resources, the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP to time-frequency resources, the time-frequency resources in the first subframe include first resources and second resources that are provided for the first OFDM symbol and the second OFDM symbol, respectively, wherein the first resources are arranged in the frequency direction and correspond to the respective OFDM subcarriers, the second resources are arranged in the frequency direction and correspond to the corresponding OFDM subcarriers, and the first resources are adjacent to the second resources in the time direction, the first modulated signals include a first sequence of first modulated signals and a second sequence of first modulated signals following the first sequence, the first sequence is mapped to the first resources within the first band in the frequency direction, from the first starting position, the second sequence is mapped to second resources within said first range, wherein the second modulated signals include a third sequence of second modulated signals and a fourth sequence of second modulated signals following the third sequence, the third sequence is mapped to the first resources within the second band in the frequency direction, from the second starting position, a fourth sequence is mapped to second resources within said second band, a sequence of third modulated signals is mapped to time-frequency resources from a third starting position, and the control information includes a first start position, a second start position, and a third start position. 5. The reception method according to claim 4, in which the first starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the first band, and the second starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the second band. 6. The receiving method according to claim 4, wherein the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP and the fourth modulated signals of the fourth PLP into time-frequency resources such that the third PLP and the fourth PLP are multiplexed into the second subframe. 7. A transmission device, comprising: a generating circuit configured to generate a preamble, a first subframe, and a second subframe such that the first subframe is provided between the preamble and the second subframe in the time direction, the preamble carrying control information, the first subframe being generated by mapping the first modulated signals of the first physical layer pipeline (PLP) and second modulated signals of the second PLP into time-frequency resources, wherein the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP into time-frequency resources; a pilot circuit configured to insert pilot signals into the preamble, the first subframe, and the second subframe; a transform circuit, configured to perform inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) processing on the preamble, the first subframe, and the second subframe into which the pilot signals are inserted, to generate an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal; And a transmission scheme configured to transmit an OFDM signal, wherein the time-frequency resources in the first subframe include first resources and second resources that are provided for the first OFDM symbol and the second OFDM symbol, respectively, the first resources being arranged in the direction frequencies and correspond to the respective OFDM subcarriers, the second resources are arranged in the frequency direction and correspond to the respective OFDM subcarriers, the first resources being adjacent to the second resources in the time direction, the first modulated signals include a first sequence of first modulated signals and a second sequence of first modulated signals following the first sequence, the first sequence is mapped to the first resources within the first band in the frequency direction, from the first starting position, the second sequence is mapped to second resources within said first range, the second modulated signals including a third sequence of second modulated signals and a fourth sequence of second modulated signals following the third sequence, the third sequence is mapped to the first resources within the second band in the frequency direction, from the second starting position, the fourth sequence is mapped to second resources within said second band, the sequence of third modulated signals is mapped to time-frequency resources in the second subframe from the third starting position, and the control information includes a first start position, a second start position, and a third start position. 8. The transmission device according to claim 7, in which the first starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the first band, and the second starting position is the position of some resource among the first resources corresponding to the lowest frequency in the second band. 9. The transmission apparatus of claim 7, wherein the second subframe is formed by mapping the third modulated signals of the third PLP and the fourth modulated signals of the fourth PLP into time-frequency resources such that the third PLP and the fourth PLP are multiplexed into the second subframe.

Images